Home

class 1 landfill permit no. 0205-sr-2 afin: 72-00171

1. Semivolatiles Extracted within 14 Organo Pest Sediments Teflon lined lid days and extracts ana PCBs lyzed within 40 days a Sludges Herbicides Ash following extractions W Aqueous P Plastic Glass CWS Concentrated Waste Samples Page 23 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 10 CORPORATION ra LABORATORIES Revision 19 May 23 2007 10 0 SAMPLE CUSTODY Standard Operating Procedures have been established for the receiving of samples into the laboratory These procedures ensure that samples are received and properly logged into the laboratory and that all associated documentation including Chain of Custody forms is complete and consistent with the sam ples received Samples delivered to American Interplex Corporation are received by the Sample Management Officer Verification of sample integrity includes the following activities Q Temperature of sample containers upon receipt Q Chain of Custody documents Q Integrity of sample containers Holding Times and Preservation Sample clearly marked and dated Appropriate containers size and type received for the requested analysis Sample container labels and or tags agree with Chain of Custody entries identification required analyses etc Any discrepancies observed during the initial as
2. sss 6 12 Distribution list for the QAPP ivi cad ici esee seite Do pesa suu ade at eed eve e ena re neant 7 3 Key positions and areas of responsibilities eeeeeeeeeeree 7 5 List of constituents with reporting levels exceeding screening levels 7 8 Proposed implementation schedule p tioni pete et ttes 10 2 LIST OF FIGURES Disposal areds csore inoen acetic adel cre ts one LL M M D MM 2 2 Proposed spring seep sampling locations eene 6 6 Proposed sampling locations eure teat dne od ebd 6 7 Project i eS 7 5 Example of sample log in COC form eene 7 11 REVISED August 1 2008 1 0 INTRODUCTION By an email correspondence dated April 11 2008 the Arkansas Department of Environmental Quality ADEQ approved the Scope of Work prepared by FTN Associates Ltd FTN and requested that FTN prepare a Phase 1 Work Plan for the Northwest Arkansas Waste Management Inc Parsons Landfill a closed facility including both Class 1 and Class 4 landfills in Washington County Arkansas The project team includes personnel from FTN Wenck Associates Inc Wenck and the Center for Toxicology and Environmental Health LLC CTEH FTN will be responsible for managing the overall project conducting field investigations performing data evaluation developing remedial option
3. mp Associates Ltd ch Ehren ee Ee water resources environmental consultants Innwood Circle Suite 220 e Little Rock AR 72211 2449 e 501 225 7779 Fax 501 225 6738 August 4 2008 AFIN 22 0c Pm 0205 9 2 Mr Bryan R REC D Technical Branch Engineer Supervisor 295 Solid Waste Management Division p AUG 04 2008 M Arkansas Department of Environmental Quality Doc ID 524457 D 5301 Northshore Drive Te Little Rock AR 72118 5317 RE Revised Phase Work Plan Northwest Arkansas Waste Management Inc Parsons Landfill Permit No 0205 SR 2 FTN No 3013 202 Dear Mr Leamons FTN Associates Ltd FTN has revised the Phase Work Plan for the Parsons Landfill and an electronic copy is attached Comments from the correspondence between Arkansas Department of Environmental Quality and FTN that were transmitted July 23 through 28 2008 via email have been incorporated into the revised work plan Your expedited review is appreciated If you have any questions regarding the submittal of this report please do not hesitate to contact me or Dianne Lincicome PE PG at 501 225 7779 Respectfully submitted FTN ASSOCIATES LTD Vie Carte fo Paul Crawford PE PG Project Manager DEL ack Enclosures CC Clark McWilliams PE Arkansas Department of Environmental Quality with enclosures RAWP_FILES 3013 20I CORRESPONDENCE L B LEAMONS 08 04 08 DOC
4. t t Pistes de ute tuts asse te 6 4 6 2 2 Spring and Seep Sampling oie Denon tne ren 6 4 6 2 3 S rface Water SAMMONS a seus te a i De e van PRAG 6 5 6 2 4 Sediment Sampling 2 erede eite tei oria quon ied dee eed 6 5 6 2 5 Groundwater Sampling oet di a tti e o Pee ae 6 8 6 2 6 Leachate ui SC s 6 9 D NIS erc 6 9 6 4 Decontamination PEOCeQUIBES iie icio ot etta ee 6 10 6 5 Sample Transport and Chain of Custody COC sees 6 11 6 6 None Samiplin ACBVIBeS tacta diea ses 6 11 6 6 1 File Review and Data Compilation eene 6 11 6 6 2 Site TREC ONMAISSADCE s src edit Doce x TR UN dee elas 6 13 6 0 5 Acfa citius state oaths of acetone eld ctu og nues totes 6 13 6 0 4 Pump Renioydl cero toii cei ea e ees eee 6 13 6 6 5 Monitoring Well Installation eee 6 14 6 6 6 Explosive Gas Monitoring lt 2 eode dae cedere Sede 6 14 6 0 7 Site 5 PH 6 15 6 0 8 Geotechnical Testing 6 15 7 0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROJECT PLAN eese eene enne ne entente enne 7 1 7 1 Project Management 5 eere pte oed o tei ve 7 1 TL Titleand JXpprovals cc onsatetiu pie 7 1 T 1 2 able Of Cotets ox cord eontra e 7 2 Pest Distib
5. MM M M M Regional Offices Fayetteville AR Baton Rouge LA and Jackson MS www ftn assoc com ftn ftn assoc com PHASE 1 WORK PLAN LANDFILL CLOSURE AND POST CLOSURE ACTIVITIES NORTHWEST ARKANSAS WASTE MANAGEMENT INC PARSONS CLASS 1 LANDFILL PERMIT NO 0205 SR 2 AFIN 72 00171 REVISED AUGUST 1 2008 PHASE 1 WORK PLAN LANDFILL CLOSURE AND POST CLOSURE ACTIVITIES NORTHWEST ARKANSAS WASTE MANAGEMENT INC PARSONS CLASS 1 LANDFILL PERMIT NO 0205 SR 2 AFIN 72 00171 Prepared for Arkansas Department of Environmental Quality Solid Waste Management Division 5301 Northshore Drive North Little Rock AR 72118 5317 Prepared by FIN Associates Ltd 3 Innwood Circle Suite 220 Little Rock AR 72211 FTN No 3013 202 REVISED August 1 2008 REVISED August 1 2008 TABLE OF CONTENTS LU SUIT RCO st ev eget pd E ios etra tet duse te 1 1 20 SDIEE DESCRIPTION AND HISTORY 2 1 2 1 Site Location and Legal 1 2 1 2 2 Description of Current 2 1 2 2 1 Topography and Surface Water Flow Paths 2 3 2 3 Site HIstorio nana a n a Bek ase esse eds 2 3 340 ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING ande n ns eure a ene as dati ps 3 1 3 1 Geology and SOs ict e bet eee eee 3 1 3
6. BN YU uM EZE EE D P A llli SNNT E soo gt i IET NN GRAA EEE IE YING NW ZZ CS M VO WMT Ohi EE eo NY NGS 2 EE NENW vem N Wl PAE Up PP EL pcm MEM ca WWI a IT Mi SCALE 1 200 Sa MMS LE EEEE i MAAA EN NYG OM T SQ OLE VLA LT LL WAS SSS SESS Fes LL NN yd yl EZZ B QIN UR PME VON MALA 24 SUN Ho HL EGE LRL ML esl 7 LL uc i ll M YVWWY GY GFE LL SS el 5 22 zm Wie Noe W P mu SSS RO Jun MI PL LLL Mn RS Iz SYLT LEGEND ML I a TIME e RM SA Ls VIL DGGE EE ON E L T LA LEE ROM INS p4 7 un WW UGE SEZ SW Die aoe AN CB Ne NN E SERES 4 ETEEN ANI 799 ii 2 K Z lr p PE emt pM WSS YEE FE To SS E WW A SON Me ZZ FENCE Pie ae TSW PONS 7700 SN AIZEN g WLM we MAIV YIH EEEL LLI S SW BEE 2222 A NE 1 Se O QUA MUZE S MEE ZA PAVED ROAD I d Ln EE A f Mj 77 022222242 E SNP ON NSE TS A Sees o man SSO oo ONIN BBE Sl EZ E EEL UNPAVED ROAD Me Pop ONSET SA SO WW e C gt re 5 Pa 2 ee UN O POWER POLE gt 1 7 ISS VENSEZA NA _ P IN x woe CX _ E NC Sen m 1 RSTN AAA Y EDGE OF WATER OR DRAINAGE WAY LAS MM dH C C L cC S N Bc CM N M F QV orm
7. Chioroprene 126998 82608 9004600 20 na 2 Dibromo 3 chloropropane DBCP 96128 82608 Dibromochloromethane 124481 8260 2 Dibromoethane EDB 106 934 82608 ltrans 1 4 Dichloro 2 butene 110576 8260 Dichlorodifluoromethane 75718 82608 394594595 0 130000 S fma 1216 666667 0 150000 1 038 nn 1 2 Dichloroethane EDC 107062 82608 500 0 123143 0 13000 07 amp 1 1 Dichloroethylene 753554 82608 700 338 843648 0 15000 60 833333 0 13000 odef nt 1 2 Dichloroethylene trans 156605 82608 10000 106829276 0 05700 019 na 0 164794 0 12000 027 121666667 0 04700 5 amp 2 2 Dichloropropane or Isopropylidene chloride 0 190000 15 a ene cione SE epee ater 1 Dichlorapropenc a and trans screening levels not available 542 75 6 8260B 0 295292 0 080009 0 19 0 13 0 5 ee ety metae ver e 547 500000 0 220000 19 ra 0 270000 SBT PERMET 4 Methyl 2 pentanone or Methyl isobutyl ketone 108 10 1 8260B 2000 000000 0 070000 0 5 ety bromide Bromomethane 74953 82608 60833333 o500000 0 Ina __ 4 275632 0 050000 na 7064516129 0 070000 Tn Methyl iodide orlodomethane 74884 8268 J 010000 na Methyl methacrylate 80656 82608 1400000007 0 07000
8. 1 of 3 Revision 1 September 2005 SAMPLE HANDLING PACKAGING AND SHIPMENT SOP 110 3 0 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS Qo gv Ge pars 9 10 11 12 Clear tape Indelible and writing pens black Bubble wrap Paper towels Duct tape Absorbent material Rigid plastic coolers Strapping tape Address labels Clear plastic bags zip lock Thermometer and Ice 4 0 PROCEDURES FOR SAMPLE PACKAGING AND STORAGE 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 Check to see that sample container lids are securely closed and wipe container exteriors with a paper towel dampened with clean water To prevent leakage from the cooler seal cooler drain on the inside with duct tape Ensure that each container has a properly completed label Place clear plastic tape over sample labels then place sample containers in clear plastic bags Samples that are suspected of having moderate to high concentration levels should be double bagged Wrap individual sample containers liberally with bubble wrap and secure the wrap with duct tape to minimize potential for breakage during shipment For additional protection line sides and bottom of cooler liberally with bubble wrap and pack cooler tightly before adding coolant Sample containers are then placed upright in a cooler Place plastic bags of ice or other suitable coolant among the sample containers to maintain the samples at or below 4 C during transport The presence of ice or frozen b
9. 5 7 19 7 3 2 Reports to 7 21 7 4 Data Validation and Usability enne 7 21 7 4 1 Data Review Verification and 7 21 7 4 2 Verification and Validation Methods eee 7 23 7 4 3 Reconciliation with User Requirement eee 7 24 RISK BV AL WIA TION a and busca UR depu 8 1 DATA EVALUATION AND REPORTS pets 9 1 9 1 Data Presentatlomouse e eoe DL 9 1 92 Dio EE 9 2 9 2 Phase 1 Closure and Post Closure Work Activities Report 9 2 iii REVISED August 1 2008 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTINUED 9 2 2 Closure and Post Closure Work Activities Summary Report 9 2 10 0 PROJECT SCHEDULE tiit restet eo aoc tu oto too at ce 10 1 LEO REFERENCES 11 1 LIST OF APPENDICES APPENDIX A Standard Operating Procedures APPENDIX B Site Safety Plan APPENDIX C Comparison of Screening Levels to Reporting Levels APPENDIX D Laboratory Quality Assurance Plan Excerpts iv REVISED August 1 2008 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 10 1 Figure 2 1 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 LIST OF TABLES Summary of analytical methods ciere Sawai aah 6 2 Sample containers preservation and holding times
10. Field data meters Hydrolab MiniSonde Hydrolab DataSonde Other LaMotte 2020 Turbidimeter Hach 2100P Turbidimeter Other Pump description Peristaltic Bladder dedicated portable Submersible Bailer description Disposable polyethylene Disposable Teflon Disposable PVC Purge depth feet Well goes dry during purging Yes No Casing vol gallons total depth feet depth to water feet well ID inches 0 0408 Time 24 hour Remarks Purge vol gallons Purge rate mL min pH su Temp C Spec cond uS cm D O mg L ORP mV Turbidity ntu Color tint Odor Sample Data Sample ID Date Time Containers Filtered Remarks Sampler s Name print Sampler Signature Form SOP 120 3 Sampling Record Revision 1 Page of FTN FIELD DATA FORM Field Measurement Record Date CST or CDT circle one Indicates QC check sample run for calibration check Form SOP 120 4 FTN Field Data Form Revision 1 Stn Date Project Name Project Number Project Manager Print Page of Laboratory Name Submitted by Parameters Method Number Lab Turn Around Time
11. Note Concentrations in ug L Note Concentrations in mgKg 2 2E 01 29E 00 amp 3EO01 t0E O 1 0E 01 hlorinated Herbicides A Note Concentrations in ug L Note Concentrations in mg Kg 2 4 0 or2 4 Dichlorophenoxya cetic acid 94757 8151A 7000 37 000000 1 00000 12 69 402 2 0E 04 85E 0 17E 01 2 4 01 Dnoso 88857 sisia 700 36 500000 0 50000 070 amp 61E 0 2 0E 03 amp 68E 02 83E 00 1 4E02 370 000000 0 10000 1 2 1 61 02 20E 04 _6 8E 03 amp t7E 00 4 0E 02 i245 TP orSiee 937231 otoo oa 17 00 _ S3A4E 023 Notes Will be analyzed if m amp p cresols are detected Includes all isomers Calculation affected by hardness These values may be adjusted by a site specific Water Effects Ratio WER as defined in 40 CFR Part 31 36 c Calculation affected by pH For PCBs an MDL must be established with each Arochlor AIC s least sensitive Arochlor has a detection of 1 ug L Note Yellow highlighted cells indicate laboratory reporting level is above screening level Cells containing two numbers under the Regulation 2 criteria consist of the Aquatic Life and Human Health Criteria Appendix C Comparison of screening levels to reporting levels Page 5 of 5 APPENDIX D Laboratory Qual
12. 6 6E 01 n a 8270C 2000000 20 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 Po 1 2 4 Trichlorobenzene 120 82 1 8270C 7000 8156425 0 65500 sf 14E 02 2 4E 02 2 6E 02 3 0E 01 4 4E 02 6 6E 01 2 4 5 Trichlorophenol 95 95 4 8270C 3650000000 045000 130 6 1E 03 1 0E 05 6 8E 04 1 4E 01 3 0E 02 6 6E 01 VOCs Acrolein 107 028 8268 Bromochloromethane 74 97 5 8260B Bromodichloromethane 75 27 4 8260B 2 4 6 Trichlorophenol 88 06 2 8270C SS See 6 111958 0 590000 6l 55000000007 0 92000 5 120 000000 1 400000 100 1 1800000 io 1825 000000 0 230000 100 _ 0 200000 026 4 4E 01 5 2E 02 1 7E 02 8 0E 03 4 0E 02 6 6E 01 Note Concentrations in ug L Note Concentrations in mg Kg na na na na na na na na na na na na Bromoform tribromomethane 75 25 2 82608 85000000 0 13000 Ppa pa pa na nn Carbon disulfide 75 15 0 82608 1042 857143 0 14000 6 na pa na na a ne Appendix C Comparison of screening levels to reporting levels Page 3 of 5 HHMSSL Industrial HHMSSL Indoor Residential Detection AIC Reporting Regulation 2 HHMSSL Worker w o Water Limit Acute Criteria Residential Dermal Carbon tetrachloride TT 56235 8260 5007 01713070 0 15000 0 22 na 912500007 0 12000 045 v 3 900000 0 20000 033 amp mene S S ae
13. FTN Associates Ltd 3 Innwood Circle Suite 220 Little Rock AR 72211 2492 501 225 7779 Fax 501 225 6738 Daily Log Project Number Page of Form SOP 120 2 Daily Log Revision 1 Groundwater Sampling Record Facility Site ID Sampler Project Number Date Sampler Organization Site Description Weather Air Temp F Wind Site type Monitoring Well Production Well Irrigation Well Other PVC Steel Iron Extraction Well Borehole Spring Well casing material Other Well diameter inches Well Total depth from TOC locked feet Yes TOC below above ground No feet Damages repairs needed Water Level Data Measuring point description Mark notch on TOC North rim of TOC Other Water level meter Heron Dipper T Slope Water Level Indicator Other Pre purge initial Pre purge confirmation During purging Purge end After sampling Remarks Time 24 hour Depth to Water feet Product LNAPL DNAPL Prod thickness feet Field Data
14. NBS traceable thermometer Because the Hydrolab temperature sensor is factory calibrated only a temperature check using a thermometer can be performed Instrument Calibration Form ICF This form is used to record information related to instrument calibration type of meter meter number calibration parameter calibration standard value parameter units meter reading of standard prior to calibration whether or not the meter was calibrated to the standard and any related comments Hydrolab flow through cell The flow through cell is a lengthened calibration cup with two tubing adapter fittings It threads onto the probe end of the Hydrolab in the same manner that the calibration cup is attached Miscellaneous tubing and adapters Various tubing sizes and adapters will be needed to connect the tubing placed in the well with the submersible or peristaltic pump and the Hydrolab flow through cell Sampling Record Form As field parameter data is being monitored in situ readings are recorded along with their corresponding times on the Sampling Record Form Other information to be recorded on the form include site data water level data and sample data 4 0 PROCEDURE 4 1 Calibration 4 1 1 General 4 1 1 1 Calibrate the Hydrolab before each sampling event 2of5 Revision 1 September 2005 FIELD TESTING USING THE HYDROLAB MINISONDE AND SOP 322 DATASONDE WITH A FLOW THROUGH CELL 4 1 1 2 Hydrolab should be positioned and sup
15. Page 35 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 j AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 13 CORPORATION Revision 19 LABORATORIES o May 23 2007 Requirements for satisfactory instrument calibration have been established to ensure that the instrument is capable of producing acceptable data 13 2 1 Initial Calibration NELAC This section specifies the essential elements that shall define the procedures and documentation for ini tial instrument calibration and continuing calibration verification to ensure that the data must be of known quality and be appropriate for a given regulation or decision The following items are essential elements of initial instrument calibration 13 2 1 1 The details of the initial instrument calibration procedures including calculations integrations acceptance criteria and associated statistics are to be included or referenced in the test method SOP and available for review NELAC 13 2 12 Raw data records must be retained to permit reconstruction of the initial instrument calibration calibration date test method instrument analysis date each analyte name analyst initials and number or signature concentration and response calibration curve or response factor or unique equation or co efficient used to reduce instrument response to concentration This information shall be maintained in one or more of the following ways in a written hardcopy ele
16. 3 If the saturated zone is being actively recharged because of a precipitation event 4 If drastic atmospheric pressure changes occur within a monitoring period Allow water levels in piezometers and monitoring wells to stabilize for a minimum of 24 hours after well construction and development before measurements are taken Repeat measurements periodically to determine if a static water level has been achieved Recovery may take longer in wells completed in tight formations 3 0 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS The device used to measure water levels should be adequate to attain an accuracy of 0 01 ft Generally acceptable devices are listed below lof4 Revision 1 September 2005 4 0 3 1 3 2 3 3 WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS SOP 610 Electric water level meter A flat graduated tape attached to a stainless steel probe containing an electrode which emits an audible and visible signal when contact with water is made This is the most common and preferred manual device Pressure Transducer An electronic probe connected to a wire cable that is lowered into the water column of a well to measure pressure The pressure measured in the total pressure which includes both the hydrostatic pressure of the fluid column above the transducer and the atmospheric pressure at the fluid surface Changes in head are proportional to changes in the height of the water column or water level Pressure transducers are designed to be used with e
17. BS CSN Gy lea BULONG LILIES SOV MN a ul jl aee Wig yy Mw 1 EXISTING GROUNDWATER MONITORING WELL ly 2C c INS on SA P O WI D PROPOSED SEDIMENT SAMPLING LOCATION LL oc DPI 5 by at E ME 2 SS ERR CERE E Ao rtl n SW 1 PROPOSED STORMWATER SAMPLING LOCATION lt lt 2 LL e BEEEISNG Se a UM 2 EY ge SS AN Eoo I p ty L 1 PROPOSED LEACHATE SAMPLING LOCATION O a ii AMARE SONS EE eR CERE iMi 3 i Nee SS NSS See ih Va ee SSS A 2 S Se ae PUR ASS Ss SS WSS EE ENS Oe i OC DID SES SSS XC aee peat KM BON SSS SS SSSSS f SS SES SSR SS St f NN 79 BEERS SS SS SSS SSS BAY SS ES usse LL oz TPN XL See OPES Ee loe Jil lt 077 Tia Wh aS SS EES SS S SSS uou cr O z PD SRLS AWE 2 BES SS ESSE a a S 2 7 lt T MANNI CARERE SSS SRS AQ TONS 2 09222 SS SSS SSS SSSSSS SEAS Hii SSSSS S822 a n S E SSSA RAW SSSSSN EZ 0 SESRRRERQJQWW_ U s S S SSS SZ ui MAK VES SM AA ESS E NOTES lt WCQ 55 MAN QQ QE 1 THIS TOPOGRAPHIC MAPPING WAS COMPILED USING gt SNO o PHOTOGRAMMETRIC MEHODS BY AMI ENGINEERING INC lt T er c FROM AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY
18. Record the following for field testing results on opened drums and drum samples as appropriate 1 Background readings for OVA meters 2 Sample readings for OVA meters 3 Type of OVA probe 4 Radiation background reading and sample radiation reading 5 Type of radiation monitor used if applicable 6 Oxygen and LEL readings from container opening 7 Water reactivity results 8 Specific gravity 9 PCB test results 10 Water solubility results 11 pH of aqueous wastes 12 Results of chemical test strips 13 Ignitability results 14 Results of other chemical hazard test kits 15 Miscellaneous comments for any tests 4 0 ATTACHMENTS Attachment A Analytical Laboratory Services Request Form Attachment B Daily Log Form Attachment C Groundwater Sampling Record Form Attachment D FTN Field Data Form Attachment E Chain of Custody Form Attachment F Calibration Record Form 5 0 REFERENCES 5 1 ASTM D4840 Standard Guide for Sampling Chain of Custody Procedures 5 of 5 Revision 1 September 2005 Page of ANALYTICAL LABORATORY SERVICES PURCHASE ORDER Today s Date Invoices correspondence packing list and all packages must reference the PO VENDOR CONTACT PERSON TELEPHONE ACCEPTED BY DATE ORDERED DATE REQUIRED Analytical Method No Of Analyses Cost Analysis SUBTOTAL SHIPPING HANDLING TAX PROJECT REQUESTED BY APPROVED BY R WP_FILES TERMS LAB LAB PO WP
19. SSS WW WEG IE EY ZS 2 RSS a ALL a E NSW TTL S ESSO eb 22 i Mon MOY ALE SSM hy SERERE BOA ES amp oo SS NY yy Uh ML RARI Gee c SS MESS IU BE S a tam SS DRE RS p a M IZ zu NAW 2 amp o zm y p tL RE SS NN SEES SS ZZ NN YU BEZEL Ol RNN 7 3 NSN w iy Sie ANS T Mug lp n 277 f if DM AEREN i ae ZA AAR MMe N DS M LGR I 2A EAT tl ALGU I A GG EG EBB SN NR iue MM T 5 Ir AL I E INA N NI MG SOLE LUN Wy SS NU LU I 3 Ly alil T M D ne T e Jif A 7 MP ani WY Y PIT a ULE 11111 A M LAMPAS MADRE A p LI ELT rn a Hg T NM ESE CoE ESSN SN N APP ML 7 APER Zot LEAL SBE yd Pag S N Wh AU S PENN VAL LL SL AOB G AAA tu TL BG 22 23 pU et py 222 LmeI BELLS 2 121122222 222 p Z7 NN NN 1O RI LG nu amp CE EE SC EEC EAN A 5 TULLIA 001111 LEE A HIE ANN Bn EEO UN ULE LYE GEFEN an AS Vig Viet Gy KE GG E ETE AD YN NW GU fc LOE KOE GEE WWW ATLL ES 7 266 EE ee I Um NG GES ON OM muc uoo de 1 Wt Mit 2 eo fr hl MU BAAR UL LL 731 7 CL EP gt T UU EEE RON PL E II
20. s specifications A 0 20 and 200 NTU standard will be used for this purpose Meter accuracy will be 0 5 or 2 below 100 NTU 3 Calibration of the HydroLab MiniSonde or Datasonde sensors will follow SOP 322 4 Field calibration of the LANDTEC GEM 2000 portable gas analyzer uses certified gas calibration cylinders and will conform to the procedure specified by the manufacturer The portable analyzer is returned to the manufacturer annually for factory calibration and certification Calibrations requiring the use of standards conductivity pH will include documentation of lot number of standard used 7 2 9 Inspection Acceptance of Supplies and Consumables The Field Sampling Leader will be responsible for obtaining and inspecting materials and solutions for field measurements Other materials must also meet specific requirements as indicated by the manufacturers Any buffers and standards used will be checked for expiration dates and appearance e g correct color Only recently purchased standards will be used for meter calibration Calibration standards will have been purchased within 30 days of analysis Inspection of laboratory supplies and consumables will be performed per AIC s QA QC Manual 7 2 10 Non Direct Measurements No non direct measurements are anticipated as part of this Phase 1 investigation 7 2 11 Data Management 7 2 11 1 Purpose Background This section presents an overview of mathematical operations
21. 13 2 Boring Log 13 2 Daily Log 13 3 Chain of Custody documentation 14 0 REFERENCES 14 1 EPA Region 4 2001 Environmental Investigations Standard Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual November 2001 14 2 EPA 1986 Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste Physical Chemical Methods EPA SW 846 as amended by updates December 1996 14 3 EPA 1986 RCRA Ground Water Monitoring Technical Enforcement Guidance Document OSWER Washington D C 7 of 7 Revision 1 September 2005 GROUNDWATER SAMPLING SOP 320 1 0 PURPOSE This Standard Operating Procedure SOP specifies methods for collection of samples which will be representative of groundwater quality 2 0 SCOPE 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 Use this and associated SOPs to collect groundwater samples They are designed to ensure that the collected samples will be representative of water in the aquifer or target formation and that the samples have not been altered or contaminated by the sampling and handling procedures These procedures apply to permanently and temporarily installed monitoring wells DPT probe holes and excavations where groundwater is present This SOP shall be used in conjunction with the site specific health and safety plan HASP to help ensure that personnel performing the work are protected from equipment related accidents and from exposure to hazardous constituents Sampling locations analytical parameters and other requirements are specified in the site
22. 4 4 Chemical Hazards Based upon FTN s initial evaluation of the Parsons Landfill site chemical hazards present at the site include explosive gas that has been measured in gas vents and or leachate wells and volatile organic compounds VOCs and elevated metals that have been measured in groundwater and surface water Preliminary review of existing data shows that VOCs and semi volatile organic compounds SVOCs reported at levels exceeding United States Environmental Protection Agency USEPA Region 6 Human Health Medium Specific Screening Levels HHMSSLs for residential water and or maximum contaminant levels MCLs in samples include bromodichloromethane benzene carbon tetrachloride chloroform chloroethane 1 2 dichloropropane 1 4 dichlorobenzene dibromochloromethane methylene chloride naphthalene tetrachloroethylene 1 1 2 2 tetrachloroethane trichloroethylene and vinyl chloride Metals reported at levels exceeding residential water HHMSSLs and or MCLs in samples include arsenic cadmium mercury lead manganese and nickel 4 2 Physical and Biological Hazards The hazards of the site include biological hazards such as snakes fire ants poison ivy etc and physical hazards including steep slopes and ravines that bound portions of the site and hazards that may arise when working near heavy equipment Differential settling in the areas used for trench fill have fissuring of the surface and depressions as deep as 10 ft
23. Extension of the manufacturer s expi ration date as a replacement date is contingent upon stability of the analyte and the ability of the labora tory to re certify the analyte Standards and spiking solutions can be re certified with an extended shelf life only if it is evaluated against a standard prepared from a different source such as an un expired Ini tial Calibration Standard Laboratory Control Sample and or standardized by comparison to a primary compound The acceptance criteria must meet initial calibration for the definitive method For stock standard solutions and working standards prepared in the laboratory a 6 month shelf life is assigned for evaluation and preparation unless the definitive method specifies differently The laboratory shall retain records for all standards reagents reference materials and media including the manufacturer vendor the manufacturer s Certificate of Analysis or purity if supplied the date of receipt recommended storage conditions defined by the manufacture or methodology an expiration date after which the material shall not be used unless its reliability is verified and traceable by the labo ratory Documentation of the standard reagent preparation is maintained in LIMs LIMs maintains documentation from chemical reagent receipt to preparation prohibiting the use of expired standards If the standards are re certified LIMs provides through programming assurance that an expired standard cannot
24. FTN Associates Ltd 124 W Sunbridge Dr Suite 3 24 Hours Fayetteville AR 72703 48 Hours Phone 479 571 3334 Fax 479 571 3338 7 Days Sampler Signature s Recorded By Print L Other Due SAMPLE DESCRIPTION Matrix Field Sample Number Date Time E of Ben Grab 55 Containers Laboratory Notes LH BH Water S Soil Other Relinquished By Signature Date Time Relinquished By Signature Date Time Sampler Remarks Laboratory Remarks Revision Date 11 22 02 Calibration Record of Meter Meter Calibration Standard Unit Meter Calibrate to Cent Number Parameter Value Reading Standard R Y or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or KL ZZ Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z ZZ or Form SOP 120 6 Calibration Record Revision 1 DECONTAMINATION OF DRILLING AND SAMPLING SOP 130 EQUIPMENT 1 0 2 0 3 0 1 of 4 PURPOSE This Standard Operating Procedure SOP describes the process for the general field decontamination of drilling and sampling equipment Decontamination procedures must ensure that all equipment contacting a sample during sample collection is free from analytes of int
25. SOP specifies methods for collection and screening of representative soil samples during field investigations 2 0 SCOPE AND COMMENTS 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 Use this SOP to collect soil samples that are representative of site conditions It is important to ensure that the collected samples are neither altered nor contaminated by sampling and handling techniques This SOP will be used in conjunction with the site specific health and safety plan HASP to help ensure that personnel performing the work are protected from equipment related accidents and from exposure to hazardous constituents This SOP covers general soil sampling for chemical analysis Sampling locations analytical parameters and other requirements are specified in the site specific work plan or sampling and analysis plan SAP Use the following SOPs in conjunction with SOP 310 e SOP 110 Sample Handling Packaging and Shipment e SOP 120 Sample Control and Field Documentation e SOP 130 Decontamination of Drilling and Sampling Equipment e SOP 140 Management of Investigation Derived Wastes e SOP 410 General Drilling Operations in Unconsolidated Materials Using a Hollow Stem Auger HSA or Direct Push Technology DPT If background sampling is warranted and feasible as determined in the site s work plan select an up gradient undisturbed location for obtaining the background samples Be aware that differences in soil types may
26. The Field Sampling Team Leader is responsible for calibrating the instruments under his her control per manufacturer s specifications before each use Calibration data will be recorded along with the identity of the instrument used for analysis Backup meters will be part of the field crew s equipment The backup meters will be calibrated the day of sampling along with the primary meters Instances of instrument malfunction will be minimized through careful attention to the manufacturer s specifications and recommendations regarding calibration handling placement and maintenance of instruments The calibration date person calibrating the instrument standards used and problems if any with the calibration procedures will be entered into the field logbook each time the instrument is calibrated Records of these calibrations will be available upon request to FTN s QA Manager as part of the QA requirements Field instruments will be calibrated immediately prior to each field trip at the end of the day and at any time a meter drift is suspected If significant drift is detected the data obtained during the day is flagged or deleted depending on the magnitude of the drift Calibration criteria for field instruments follow 1 The water level meter will be calibrated with a metal tape prior to leaving for the field SOP 610 7 15 REVISED August 1 2008 2 Turbidity meter Calibration of the turbidity meter will follow manufacturer
27. same day overnight etc are met Page 20 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 9 CORPORATION e LABORATORIES evision 19 May 23 2007 TABLE 1 Sample Preservation and Holding Times PARAMETER MATRIX CONTAINER PRESERVATION HOLDING TIME M Chloride Total Acidi Demand Bromide None Required Chemical Oxygen Cool lt 6 C H SO pH 2 i Chlorine Total Resid None Required Color Cyanide Total M M oj Cool lt 6 C NaOH gt 12 plus 0 6 g Ascorbic acid Ascorbic acid Cyanide Amendable to Chlorination Fluoride G Hardness Kjeldahl and Organic P G 28 days Nitrogen Analyze immediate coverable Cool lt 6 C HySO pH lt 2 TDS TSS Silica lt Wf Oy Codsbt o Bdays And NaOH to pH gt 9 Analyze Immediatel Toxicity o co p s P 6 Page 21 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 AMERICAN Section 9 LABORATORIES n nos CONTAINER PRESERVATION HOLDING TIME G Cool lt 6 C H SO pH lt 2 P G Cool lt 6 C H SO pH lt 2 28 days Cool lt 6 C H SO pH lt 2 28 days Cool lt 6 C H SO pH lt 2 28 days Cool lt 6 C 50 pH lt 2 28 days Cool lt 6 C H580 pH lt 2 7 days until extrac
28. strong 3 of 4 Revision 1 September 2005 GENERAL DRILLING OPERATIONS IN UNCONSOLIDATED SOP 410 MATERIALS USING A HOLLOW STEM AUGER HSA OR DIRECT PUSH TECHNOLOGY DPT 6 0 ATTACHMENTS Attachment A Example boring log 7 0 REFERENCES 7 1 ASTM D6151 Standard Practice for Using Hollow Stem Augers for Geotechnical Exploration and Soil Sampling 7 2 ASTM D2488 Standard Practice for the Description and Identification of Soil Visual Manual Procedure 7 3 EPA 1991 Handbook of Suggested Practices for the Design and Installation of Ground Water Monitoring Wells Environmental Monitoring System Laboratory Office of Research and Development 7 4 1986 RCRA Ground Water Monitoring Technical Enforcement Guidance Document OSWER Washington D C 4 of 4 Revision 1 September 2005 PROJECT BORING ID LOCATION WELL ID DRILLING CONTRACTOR NORTHING EASTING DRILLING EQUIPMENT GROUND SURFACE ELEV TOC ELEVATION DRILLING METHOD TOTAL DEPTH DEPTH TO WATER LOGGED BY SAMPLING METHOD DATE STARTED DATE COMPLETED Well Construction Description MONITORING WELL CONSTRUCTION SOP 510 1 0 PURPOSE This Standard Operating Procedure SOP describes the process of monitoring well construction for site assessments and groundwater monitoring programs 2 0 SCOPE 2 1 22 2 3 24 2 5 Subcontractors performing work under FTN s quality assurance program shall follow this
29. tron 5 ai e eR Le a eee Rae 7 3 7 1 4 Project Task Orgamatton e aka vei ee Gees 7 3 7 1 5 Problem Definition Background eene 7 4 TAL Project Task Description oo eei dta 7 6 ii REVISED August 1 2008 8 0 9 0 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTINUED 7 1 7 Quality Objectives and Criteria aieo etri deco ion 7 6 7 1 8 Special fett ufo 7 7 1 19 Documents ANG AS 7 1 7 2 Data Generation RE desea AER EO RUE ANTH EN e e e edad 7 9 7 2 1 Sampling Process Design aee eit 7 9 7 2 2 Sapling Methods rie caia eden a Bestel el ean 7 9 7 2 3 Sample Handling and Custody eee 7 9 TAA Analytical E R 7 12 Pode Quality le tob edi cnm 7 12 7 2 0 Field OC Proced res sai a gasses tet ARS 7 13 7 2 7 Instrument Equipment Testing Inspection and Maintenance 7 14 7 2 8 Instrument Equipment Calibration and Frequency 7 15 7 2 9 Inspection Acceptance of Supplies and Consumables 7 16 7 2 10 Non Direct e Uo Rebate dts 7 16 72 LT Data Management bietet dea duda etude 7 16 41 39 Assessment and OVeEsiglit a ectetuer ossis 7 19 7 3 1 Assessments and Response
30. 04 3 5E 04 1 8E 02 2 0E 01 Mercury 7487 94 7 7470A 0 002 0 011 0 000063 0 0002 0 0024 2 3E 01 6 1E 02 3 4E 02 3 2E 02 1 0E 01 Nickel 7440 02 0 6020 6010B 0 73 0 000330 0 004 di 1 6E 03 4 1E 04 2 3E 04 7 0E 00 1 4E 02 1 0 00 Selenium 7782 49 2 6020 6010B 0 050 0 183 0 000270 0 002 0 02 3 9E 02 1 0E 04 5 7E 03 3 0E 01 9 9E 01 7 0 00 Silver 7440 22 4 6020 6010B 0 183 0 000033 0 0003 3 9E 02 1 0E 04 5 7 03 2 0E 00 1 3E 01 1 0E 00 Thallium Total 6020 6010B 0 002 0 003 0 000009 0 001 5 5E 00 1 4E 02 7 9E 01 4 0E 01 5 2E 01 1 0E 00 Tin Total 6020 6010B 21 9 0 010000 0 2 4 7E 04 1 0E 05 1 0E 05 2 1E 01 1 0E 00 Vanadium 7440 62 2 6020 6010B 0 183 0 000980 0 003 3 9E 02 1 0E 04 5 7E 03 3 0 02 1 4E 01 1 0E 00 Zinc 7440 66 6 6020 6010B 11 0 000900 0 002 add 2 3E 04 1 0E 05 1 0E 05 6 2E 02 1 4E 01 2 0E 01 8015 Method Note Concentrations in mg L Note Concentrations in mg Kg Isobutyl alcohol 78 83 1 8015B 0 100000 10 na na SVOCs Note Concentrations in ug L Note Concentrations in mg Kg Acenapthene 83 32 9 8270C 3 7E 03 3 8E 04 3 3E 04 2 9 01 6 6E 01 Acenapthylene 208 96 8 8270C 6 6E 01 Acetophenone 98 86 2 8270C 1 7E 03 1 7E 03 1 7E 03 6 6E 01 2 Acetylaminofluorene or 2 AAF 53 96 3 8270C 6 6E 01 4 Aminobiphenyl 92 67 1 8270C 6 6E 01 Anthracene 120 12 7 8270C 2 2E 04 1 0E 05 1 0E 05 5 9E 02 6 6E 01 Benzo a anthracene 56 55 3 8270C 7 8E 00 2 3E 00 8 0E 02 Benzo a pyrene 50 32 8 8270C 4 0E 01 Benzo b fluoranth
31. 14 days SVOCs 1 000 mL glass None 7 40 days Cyanide 500 mL plastic NaOH pH gt 12 14 days Pesticides Herbicides PCBs 1 000 mL glass None 7 40 days Sulfide 500 mL plastic Zinc Acetate NaOH pH gt 9 7 days Isobutyl Alcohol 500 mL plastic None 14 days Soil Matrix pH 250 mL glass None As soon as possible Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen 250 mL glass None Not defined Nitrate Nitrite as Nitrogen 250 mL glass None 48 hours Ammonia as Nitrogen 250 mL glass None Not defined Total Phosphorus 250 mL glass None 6 months Total Metals 250 mL glass None 6 months Hexavalent Chromium 250 mL glass None 24 hours Mercury 250 mL glass None 28 days TOC 250 mL glass None 28 days Chloride Sulfate 250 mL glass None 28 days SVOCs 250 mL glass None 7 40 days Cyanide 250 mL glass None 14 days PCBs 250 mL glass None 7 40 days Pesticides Herbicides 250 mL glass None 7 40 days Sulfide 250 mL glass None 7 days Isobutyl Alcohol 250 mL glass None 14 days Time between sample collection and extraction time between extraction and analysis FTN will compile review and summarize available information related to the project site This will include compiling a database of existing data reviewing the database and qualifying data of questionable quality A water well search for wells within 2 miles of the site will be conducted using available records at the Arkansas Geological Commission USGS and 6 12 REVISED A
32. 2 Calculate time needed to purge 1 well volume 1 purging equipment volume V D Time Where V well volume determined or purging equipment volume D discharge rate calculated above 3 Make new measurements each time the pumping rate is changed or 5 4 Usea totalizing flow meter and 1 Record the reading on the totalizer prior to purging 2 Record the reading on the totalizer at the end of purging 3 Subtract the reading on the totalizer prior to purging from the reading on the totalizer at the end of purging to obtain volume purged 5 5 Record in the field logbook the times that purging begins and ends 6 of 10 Revision 1 September 2005 WELL PURGING SOP 321 6 0 TUBING AND PUMP PLACEMENT 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 Use new or dedicated tubing where applicable Do not lower the pump or tubing to the bottom of the well Pump or tubing placement will be determined by the purging option selected i e conventional or minimizing purge volume If the following conditions can be met for minimizing purge volume position the intake hose or pump at the midpoint of the screened or open hole interval e The same pump must be used for both purging and sampling e The well screen interval must be less than or equal to 10 feet and e The well screen must be fully submerged Position the pump or intake in the top one foot of the water column or no deeper than necessary for the type of pump
33. 2 0 SCOPE 2 1 This SOP shall be used in conjunction with the site specific health and safety plan HASP to help ensure that personnel performing the work are protected from equipment related accidents and from exposure to hazardous constituents 2 2 This SOP covers general drilling operations lithologic logging and borehole abandonment Specifics of the investigation including drilling and sampling locations investigation depths sampling and testing and any special requirements will be specified in the site specific work plan or sampling and analysis plan SAP Specialized sampling may require modification of these procedures beyond the scope of this SOP 2 3 Use the following SOPs in conjunction with SOP 410 e SOP 130 Decontamination of Drilling and Sampling Equipment e SOP 140 Management of Investigation Derived Wastes e SOP 310 Soil Sampling e SOP 510 Monitoring Well Construction 3 0 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS Descriptions of commonly used pieces of equipment are listed below and are typically provided by the subcontractor 3 1 HSA rig and tools capable of drilling and sampling to the desired depth and equipped with split spoons Shelby tubes or continuous samplers 32 DPT rig and drill rods capable of pushing sampler to desired depth 3 3 Potable water and decontamination equipment 3 4 Plug and abandonment supplies and equipment bentonite grout grout pump or mixer etc 3 5 Waste containers 3 6 Equipment and supplies
34. 2 Hydrogeology and Local Groundwater Use eee 3 3 3 3 S rface pilae 3 5 3 4 Ecological Systems eee sv reete UN or Ger deae iuis edes koe da redu dado 3 5 4 0 PREVIOUS INVESTIGATIONS DATA GAPS 1 eerte rennen 4 1 4 1 SPUN Payal SECS Ni a ec Nak nee bes nel pL nnnc i aedi 4 4 27 Surge eMe ata aM E petalis pedals 4 3 A sarah tet cee m 4 2 4A Geology and Oeo e ue 4 2 4 5 Groundwater ape de cei aide aia eee al a an aufs 4 3 4 6 ll So s senior ceed e A EE d Mec Seals ern en ce 4 5 30 PROJECT APPROACH QUEDAR E UE An tiara 5 1 60 SITE ASSESSMENT SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS PLAN eren 6 1 6 1 Selection of Analytical eee eene ttes 6 1 Gd Surface SOLL 6 1 0 1 25 Springs dnd Sesso eu esee irte eiui fedeli 6 3 61 37 Surface Waterin dod bti 6 3 OL 4 tbi e E ETAS 6 3 OU GrouUnGWaler aceite eds eap breui 6 3 JESSe Bite xot steht s beet a DLE HM S LIUM 6 4 REVISED August 1 2008 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTINUED 6 2 Sampling Locations and Field Sampling Methodology 6 4 Soll
35. 2008 6 5 Sample Transport and Chain of Custody COC The laboratory will provide FTN with clean sample containers Table 6 2 shows the type of sample containers required volume of sample to be collected preservatives to be used and holding time for samples Sample handling packaging and shipment and COC procedures are described in SOP 110 and SOP 120 A COC seal will be placed at the front left and rear right sides of the cooler so that anyone opening the lid will break the COC seals Samples will be delivered either directly to the laboratory or by overnight courier to ensure timely receipt of samples Sample custody procedures will be observed to ensure that samples are collected transferred stored analyzed and destroyed only by authorized personnel A COC is also necessary to document measures taken to prevent and or detect tampering with the samples The Field Sampling Team Leader and or Field Geologist are responsible for the care and custody of each sample until they are relinquished to another authorized person or the designated laboratory The transfer of samples to other personnel will be documented on a COC record sheet This record must include the collectors signatures identification of all samples collected and date and time of collection The individuals relinquishing and receiving samples will sign date and note the time on the record The laboratory will upon receipt of the samples initiate internal COC records to a
36. 4 1986 to allow for composting of municipal wastewater treatment sludge within the 40 acre permitted area on the condition that the composting operation did not overlie any previously landfilled waste ADEQ internal correspondence states that information submitted to the Water Division for modification of the water permit showed that the composting operation would be conducted outside the 40 acre permitted area It is unknown at this time whether this issue was ever resolved or if composting operations were ever conducted at the site In addition to being approved to accept wastewater treatment sludge the landfill also received dissolved air flotation skimmings from Tyson Foods also known as Ocoma Foods at Berryville In two separate proposals the facility apparently proposed to expand the Class 1 and Class 4 landfills in late 1988 or early 1989 documentation is incomplete The proposed area of expansion of the Class 1 landfill was to the east south and west of the permitted Area 2 expanding Area 2 from approximately 18 2 acres to 31 6 acres The facility proposed to expand the Class 4 landfill to fill three additional ravines Figure 2 1 It is unclear whether these expansions were ever approved or implemented The landfill has had a history of operational problems leachate problems and groundwater issues Consent Administrative Order CAO LIS 87 012 dated April 2 1987 noted several violations related to trench construction trench cert
37. 4E 04 4 0E 01 5 2E 02 3 3E 00 4 6 Dinitro o cresol or 4 6 Dinitro 2 methylphenol 534 52 1 8270C 2 3E 02 6 6E 01 2 4 Dinitrophenol 51 28 5 8270C 73 000000 0 308000 5 1 2E 02 44E 03 1 4E 03 1 0E 02 2 1E 02 6 6E 01 73 000000 044100 10 1 2E 02 4 1E 03 1 4E 03 4 0E 05 3 0E 02 6 6E 01 2 4 Dinitrotoluene 121 14 2 8270C 2 6 Dinitrotoluene 606 20 2 82700 36 50000 0 581000 10 61E 01 2 0E 03 6 8E 02 3 0E 05 3 9E 02 6 6E 01 88 85 7 8270 6 1E 01 2 0E 08 68E 02 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 Diphenylamine 122 39 4 g270c_ 912 500000 10 000000 1 0 1560 51E 04 17E 04 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 Disulfoton 298 04 4 8270C Ethyl methanesulfonate 62 50 0 8270C 200000 20 J 11 20 000000 20 XA 52 85 7 8270C Fluoranthene 206 44 0 8270C Hexachlorobenzene 118 74 1 8270C Hexachlorobutadiene 87 68 3 8270C _ 2 4E 00 82 01 27E 01 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 6 5E 01 6 6E 01 sd 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 DL ee 1460 000000 0 37800 10 J 2 3E 03 82E 04 2 4E 04 2 1E 02 2 6E 02 6 6E 01 86 73 7 8270 243333333 0 635000 410 2 6E 03 3 3E 04 2 6E 04 2 8 01 43E 02 6 6E 01 0 042020 0 835000 tT 3 6E 00 1 2E 00 1 0E 01 5 6E 02 6 2E 00 7 3E 01 2 5E 01 _1 0E 01 4 6E 02 6 6E 01 Hexachlorocyclopentadiene 77 47 4 8270C 50 00 219 000000 0 58000 10 3 7E 02 1 2E 04 41
38. 5 5 The FTL or field team member should verify sample containers and preservatives for the appropriate size and type of sample 5 6 If the FTL or field team member collects samples with direct grab method follow the procedure outlined below 1 Collect surface grab samples within the top 12 inches of the water column Avoid skimming the surface of the water during collection unless specifically required by the sampling plan 2 Where practical use the actual unpreserved sample container as the collection device direct grab 3 Slowly remove the container cap and slowly submerge the container opening first into the water 4 Invert the bottle so the opening is upright and pointing towards the direction of water flow if applicable Allow water to run slowly into the container until filled 5 Return the filled container quickly to the surface 6 Pour out a small volume of sample away from and down stream of the sampling location This procedure allows for addition of preservatives Do not use this step for volatile organics or other analytes where headspace is not allowed in the sample container 7 Add preservatives if required securely cap container label and complete field notes 8 If preservatives have been added invert the container several times to ensure sufficient mixing of sample and preservatives 9 Check preservation of the sample and adjust pH with additional preservative if necessary 5 7 If the laboratory provi
39. Director is responsible for seeing that corrective and preventative ac tion procedures are implemented provide a systematic approach to assess the issues restore the labora tory s system integrity and prevent reoccurrence 15 8 6 4 The Director of Quality Assurance DQA in the event that an out of control situation goes unnoticed by the above personnel must notify the Laboratory Director help identify and solve the problem where applicable and ensure that the work is stopped on the analysis and that no suspect data is reported The DQA must review and approve all corrective action reports I5 9 Management Reviews Annually the laboratory s quality system Quality Assurance Quality Control Manual and Standard Op erating Procedures and its testing and calibration activities are reviewed and updated This managerial review provides an opportunity for management to determine the effectiveness of the quality system and 1o introduce any necessary changes or improvements in laboratory operations The review summarizes the Laboratory Managers and the Director of Quality Assurance s assessment of quality the results of Page 59 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 15 CORPORATION Revision 19 RIES LABORATO May 23 2007 inter laboratory comparisons proficiency tests corrective actions customer complaints and other
40. Extra care should be taken to maintain footing in areas of steep slopes and fissuring General common sense rules for equipment operation are as follows Inspect equipment before operation to be sure it is in good operating condition Before moving machine make sure people are clear Slow down when backing up or when on ramps and curves Allow for safe stopping distances Do not drive through dust clouds pu Ou ier us Exercise caution on slopes or near banks 4 DRAFT April 22 2008 7 Follow decontamination procedures for equipment 8 Use designated parking areas and shut down procedures 9 Always wear a hard hat and foot protection 10 Be aware of the location of the equipment near you 11 Do not operate anything you are not qualified to 12 Never walk in front or back of moving equipment 13 Be aware that equipment can be a source of ignition for flammable explosive materials Drill rig crews are confronted with all of these equipment hazards therefore maintenance and good housekeeping are constant requirements 4 3 Heat Stress During field activities personnel may encounter temperatures above 70 F Hot humid weather can cause physical discomfort loss of efficiency personal injury and in the extreme can be life threatening therefore monitoring for heat stress is required Heat stress can be manifested in mild symptoms such as fatigue irritability decreased concentration and anx
41. Labeled LIMS Use Certifications Traceable 2 Maintenance Log Documentation Service 1 SOP Current Testing Audited Standards Audited 2 Thermometers Logs us to Date 1 Archive Procedures Hard Copies System Back ups 2 Training Records Training Log PE Samples SOP Test Demonstration of Capability 3 Sequence Logs Proper QC Frequency 2 Review Procedures Corrective Action Forms GALP Notebooks Reviewed and signed off Manual Integration Docu mented Manual Integration Reviewed on Screen Page 46 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 14 CORPORATION Revision 19 LABORATORIES May 23 2007 2 MDLS PQLS All instruments current Lowest Standard Reporting Limit Matrix Specific 2 SMG Procedures pH Checks Documentation Procedures Temperature Checks Review Method Audit Review SOP per method Type Review RM Review Worksheets Review Quality System Volatiles GC GC MS Semivolatiles GC MS HPLC Organic Preparation Metal Preparation Mer cury Method Gravimetric Method Titrimetric Method Spectrophotometric Electrometric IC TCLP 14 5 Quality Control Check Analysis 14 5 1 Laboratory Control Samples LCS contain a known amount of target analyte They are pre pared in the laboratory or obtained from a source other than the standards used for calibration This ac curacy information is valuable because variables
42. Remove the sample from the sampler by pushing or scraping the soil with an appropriate pre cleaned utensil into aluminum foil 7 5 Remove any portion of the sample that has been disturbed and discard 7 6 Follow sample collection procedures as outlined in Section 4 3 through 4 6 SPLIT SPOON SAMPLER Suitable for reaching soils from approximately 12 inches to depths greater than 10 feet 8 1 Advance the sampler using the weight of the drilling stem and rods or a mechanical hammer 8 2 Inserta catcher device in the head ring to prevent loss of unconsolidated sample during recovery 8 3 After retrieving the sampler expose the soil by unscrewing the bit and head rings and splitting the barrel 84 If recovery is enough to accommodate discarding a portion of the sample discard the top two to three inches 8 5 If PID screening is required refer to Section 12 0 8 6 For VOC analysis collect the sample from the center portion of the split spoon Slice the sample from the center portion of the split spoon using a clean utensil 8 7 Follow sample collection procedures as outlined in Section 4 3 through 4 6 8 8 Ream out the interval previously sampled interval and repeat the procedure until total depth is reached CONTINUOUS SAMPLER A continuous sampler is used when extensive sampling and or relatively undisturbed samples are required It s use requires special drill bits and drill stem that allows the 5 ft split barrel sampler to
43. SENSN SIN Gi ENS Yj ERB UF ANS SSNS WW RAW WO AU RANN WM SQA mes e SONGS SS NS lt QNUM ONIS SESS QAM FOSC S N Wil OSES AQAA AH ACE NENNEN NW RU TA SUM um i WS T iS N I UN NN Py mie oe NIMMT NA TOT VSS AACR y 12 VE SMA ANI AR AE SS YW ari L ARUM ANWR REN RET TR OS Sa j4 PCR a T 2 f yo hr Mh X MAT d diu 7 M pM pK mem Jl Wy My My Ml ptt 2 A J Wt A HVE y ty ee WHEE L ial VAR M VIA go N nea a 22 7 ae PEL C ge gE em EN st LEE A Ee S ONT oY N SN XN S e QN de NN 5 tae rp KS Wl YM pm eT LT AM ie It NS n I WN I Y EJ mom 2 c a Ec c c c C woler resources environmental consultants fP ll SSW N N E
44. SOP for constructing and developing wells or may use their own procedure s as long as the substitute meets requirements prescribed by the Quality Assurance Project Plan QAPP This SOP will be used in conjunction with the site specific health and safety plan HASP to help ensure that personnel performing the work are protected from equipment related accidents and from exposure to hazardous constituents Installation of monitoring wells will be conducted in accordance with applicable state and federal regulations This SOP is for the construction of typical monitoring wells in the region Monitoring well locations total depth and construction details shall be specified in a site specific work plan or sampling and analysis plan SAP Any special construction requirements will be specified in the site specific SAP Use the following SOPs in conjunction with SOP 510 e SOP 120 Sample Control and Field Documentation e SOP 130 Decontamination of Drilling and Sampling Equipment e SOP 140 Management of Investigation Derived Wastes e SOP 410 General Drilling Operations in Unconsolidated Materials Using a Hollow Stem Auger HSA or Direct Push Technology DPT 3 0 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS Descriptions of commonly used pieces of equipment are listed below 3 1 Well construction supplies some of these items are suggestions only and the list is not all inclusive e Silica sand 1 10 20 20 40 etc grain size as required e Ce
45. Sampling Procedures Ground Water Issue OSWER EPA 540 S 95 504 3 of 3 Revision 1 September 2005 WELL PURGING SOP 321 1 0 PURPOSE This Standard Operating Procedure SOP specifies methods for collection of samples that will be representative of the groundwater being sampled 2 0 SCOPE 2 1 Use this SOP to collect groundwater samples It is designed to ensure that the collected samples will be representative of water in the aquifer or target formation and that the samples have not been altered or contaminated by the sampling and handling procedures These procedures apply to permanently and temporarily installed monitoring wells and excavations where groundwater is present 2 2 This SOP shall be used in conjunction with the site specific health and safety plan HASP to help ensure that personnel performing the work are protected from equipment related accidents and from exposure to hazardous constituents 2 3 Use the following SOPs in conjunction with SOP 321 e SOP 320 Groundwater Sampling e SOP 610 Water Level Measurements e SOP 322 Field Testing Using the HydroLab MiniSonde or Datasonde with a Flow Through Cell e SOP 120 Sample Control and Field Documentation e SOP 130 Decontamination of Drilling and Sampling Equipment e SOP 140 Management of Investigation Derived Wastes 3 0 Equipment and Materials Use groundwater purging and sampling equipment constructed of only non reactive non leachable materials that are compatible
46. TAKEN FROM AN ALTITUDE S m TA DOWN GGEXRLQVWeE OF 3960 FEET ABOVE MEAN TERRAIN ON MARCH 10 lt SUIS MA MN DONS 2008 A Lily A NS SA t o 2 THIS MAPPING WAS COMPILED FOR PRODUCTION lt D eZ NYY Wy WY WEE FINAL MAP SCALE OF 1 INCH 100 FEET AND TO E cd Gly yy Wy MY II SHOW CONTOURS ON AN INTERVAL OF 2 FEET THE oO 110 y MY UE EE ACCURACY THAT THIS MAPPING WAS COMPILED TO LUI lt pe oe mi Nr 28 M EE EEE MEET IS 3 8 FEET HORIZONTAL ACCURACY AND x SY IW SEE Il EEE 1 2 FEET VERTICAL ACCURACY AT 95 CONFIDENCE ON o qd CN HENS ESSE 2A IN ZN ZEEE WELL DEFINED POINTS lt A4 hy SN OT DOSE SQ QS ya Soe le haa 2 240 77 EUG Ga 5 MAPPING IN AREAS WHICH ARE OBSCURRED BY o s EE Zl HU LLY yy lp VEGETATION SHADOWS ETC MAY NOT MEET THE O DANN S INR NR ON Zee te III NEB 1 ABOVE ACCURACY STATEMENT SAW N a BUEZ ESZE E IHUN LM p edd TWAS S BARREN S ee LIY MEAN LL ab LLZ Eu FANN 1 J WRASSE c 7 WW e e LA HERE A ZA NS 4 TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY INFORMATION IS FROM AN NYAS gt SS 2 ANAT i ASSESS NILES E 2 AERIAL SURVEY CONDUCTED BY AMI ENGINEERING INC NNNM g M POSEEN NSS STE SY RAGS SSS ee W ON MARCH 10 2008 LON Wy IET Cp eS iy Qu e Ts sy FBR FS ut zZ NC mJ SST P
47. Tef lon lined lids lon lined lids swirl to mix sample and transfer to a 40 ml Semivolatiles Water No i gal 2x 0 5 gal or4x 1 Cool x6 C Extracted within 14 Orga Pest gt Residual L amber glass container PCBS Chlorine with Teflon line lid Herbicides 40 days after extraction RM5030 VOA Collect sample in 125 ml container which 14 days VOA vial Cool lt 6 C HCL pH 2 days and extracts ana Page 22 of 121 Cool lt 6 C 7 days until extraction 40 days after extraction RM5031 VOA has been pre preserved with 4 drops of Solid RM 5035 40 ml vials Cool 6 C 14 days Sediments with septum and stirring Sludges bar Ash RM 5031 5032 125 ml wide mouth glass con tainer with Teflon lined lids lyzed within 40 days 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 j AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 9 CORPORATION LABORATORIES Revision 19 May 23 2007 PARAMETER MATRIX CONTAINER PRESERVATION HOLDING TIME Semivolatiles Water with 1 gal 2x 0 5 gal or 4x 1 Organo Pest Residual L amber glass container PCBs Chlorine with Teflon line lid Herbicides Add 3 ml 1096 sodium thiosulfate per Extracted within 14 gallon Or 0 008 Addition of sodium days and extracts ana thiosulfate solution to sample container lyzed within 40 days may be performed in the laboratory prior flowing extractions to field use Cool to lt 6 C Soils 250 ml wide mouth Cool lt 6 C
48. and pertinent times Subcontractors and field team members on site Work performed including sampling locations Quality control samples Problems encountered corrective action taken Sketches and calculations pertaining to the job Supplies and equipment used 10 Photographic log if applicable 11 Decontamination procedures performed 12 Excursions from approved plans or procedures and 13 Special notes 3 2 4 change an incorrect entry on forms and logs draw a single line through the entry write the change above or adjacent to the entry and date and initial the change If anyone other than the person to whom a logbook is assigned makes an entry that person should date and sign the entry 3 2 5 All project logbooks are to be turned over to the FTL at the end of each work period and to a central file at the end of the field activity 3 3 Sampling Records 3 3 The FTL or designee shall ensure completion of Sampling Records for aqueous samples Attachment C or Sampling Records for samples collected from other media as appropriate i e recording all information pertinent to the collection of sample media on this log 3 3 2 The FTL shall ensure that information is supplied for all fields provided Write N A for not applicable in the field as appropriate 3 3 3 The FTL or designee shall record additional information as necessary in the daily log At a minimum the followi
49. and sampling e The well screen or open hole interval is less than or equal to 10 ft and e The well screen is fully submerged If the well screen is partially submerged and the pump will be used for both purging and sampling the pump will be positioned midway between the measured water level and the bottom of the screen If the screen or open hole interval is greater than 10 ft in one or more monitoring wells groundwater samples will be collected from two or more depth intervals in at least one well to investigate the potential for stratification of contaminants Monitoring wells will be purged with a peristaltic pump submersible pump or bladder pump at low flow rates of approximately 0 1 to 0 5 L min SOP 321 Water levels will be monitored while pumping as a guide to flow rate adjustment The goal is minimal drawdown 0 3 ft during purging Under no circumstances will a well be pumped dry The discharge rate will be measured with a graduated cylinder and stopwatch Water levels and pumping rates will be measured and recorded every 3 to 5 minutes during purging Groundwater samples will be collected from the discharge line after field parameters stabilize and placed directly into sample containers Samples will be collected at low flow rates of less than 100 mL min Data stabilization is defined as three successive readings with variation 6 8 REVISED August 1 2008 of 0 1 su for pH 3 uS cm for specific conductivity and di
50. and two QC samples one duplicate and one rinsate blank will be collected 63 IDW IDW will consist of both aqueous and solid wastes IDW such as soil rock cuttings decontamination liquids groundwater well purge and development liquids disposable sampling equipment and disposable personal protective equipment PPE will be segregated placed in closed containers and staged at a designated location on site for characterization and subsequent disposal as described in SOP 140 All IDW containers will be labeled to indicate the type of 6 9 REVISED August 1 2008 material contained including depths for soils rock boring numbers well identifications and dates when materials were initially placed in the container Composite samples will be collected from the non aqueous IDW containers for analytical testing and waste profile development One composite sample will be collected for every five drums of IDW containing soil or rock cuttings Soil rock samples will be analyzed for VOCs semi volatile organic compounds SVOCs and RCRA metals The total values for the soil samples assuming they are greater than 0 5 solids will be divided by 20 for comparisons with Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure TCLP regulatory levels see USEPA TCLP Test Method No SW846 1311 and Title 40 Code of Federal Regulations CFR Part 261 24 Table 1 A factor of 20 is used to account for the dilution that occurs in the TCLP test The disposi
51. be cleaned prior to use and between sampling locations e g monitoring wells Wash with detergent solution For surfaces of equipment that cannot be adequately disassembled and cleaned e g pumping equipment tubing circulate decontamination solutions through equipment Rinse with potable water Rinse with desorbing agent Inorganic desorbing agents include 10 nitric acid and 10 hydrochloric acid Organic desorbing agents include pesticide grade isopropanol acetone hexane and methanol Revision 1 September 2005 DECONTAMINATION OF DRILLING AND SAMPLING SOP 130 EQUIPMENT 5 5 Rinse with analyte free or deionized water not distilled water Allow all water from final rinse to drain from pumps tubing before reuse 5 6 Allow equipment to air dry unless it is reused immediately 5 7 Wrap equipment where appropriate with inert material aluminum foil or plastic wrap or place in zipper sealed bags for transport to prevent contact with potentially contaminated material 5 8 Do not attempt to clean or reuse sample filtration media sample containers bailer rope rubber hoses or plastic gloves 6 0 FIELD INSTRUMENTS Follow manufacturer s recommendations for cleaning instruments At a minimum 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 Wipe down equipment body probes and cables with detergent solution Check manufacturer s instructions for recommendations and or restrictions on cleaning Rinse thoroughly with potable water
52. be lowered through the drill stem and locked into place where the bottom of the sampler extends ahead of the auger The sampler is pressed ahead of the drill stem as the borehole is advanced After the desired depth is reached and the sampler is retrieved select samples from the desired depth and follow sample collection procedures in Section 8 5 through 8 8 Using a continuous sampler eliminates the step required to ream the sampled interval before the next sample can be collected 4 of 7 Revision 1 September 2005 SOIL SAMPLING SOP 310 10 0 SHELBY TUBE Used to sample unconsolidated soil and consists of a tube approximately 30 inches long and two inches or larger in diameter 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 After drilling to the required depth a soil sample is obtained by pushing the tube into the soil using the drilling rig s hydraulic ram or manually with a sledgehammer Extrude the sample from the Shelby tube Use a decontaminated utensil to remove any portion of the sample that has been disturbed Collect samples for VOC analysis from the center portion of the tube For other analyses slice the sample from the center portion of the tube using a clean decontaminated utensil Follow Section 4 3 through 4 6 in handling the sample 11 0 DIRECT PUSH SAMPLING Suitable for reaching soils from approximately 12 inches to depths greater than 10 feet depending on the DPT rig and the soil type that is en
53. calibration verification shall be varied within the established calibration range If internal standards are used only one continuing instrument calibration verification must be analyzed per analytical batch The Difference must be consistent with the acceptance criteria as defined in the method If linear regression is employed the continuing calibration check standards must have a Difference of less than 15 for standards in the mid point of the curve If the continuing calibration verification results obtained are outside established acceptance criteria corrective actions must be taken A solvent blank which matches the solvent used in the preparation of the sample for analysis is ana lyzed after a standard or after a contaminated sample to check for carry over contamination 13 3 4 Gas Chromatographs Mass Spectrometers GC MS Procedures for calibration and instrument tuning for sensitivity and selectivity by the mass spectrome ters are dependent upon the instrument s ability to sense a change in charge with reference to the mass of the compound Calibration curves for volatiles and semi volatiles analyses consist of a five 5 point calibration curve Page 40 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 13 CORPORATION R e LABORATORIES evision 19 May 23 2007 Concentrations of the calibration curve standards are specified or defined b
54. considered to have an increased quantitative uncertainty and shall be reported using defined qualifiers or flags or explained in the case narrative NELAC Page 36 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 13 CORPORATION kis LABORATORIES Revision 19 May 23 2007 13 2 1 8 Measured concentrations outside the working range shall be reported as having less certainty and shall be reported using defined qualifiers or flags or explained in the case narrative The lowest cali bration standard must be above the limit of detection Noted exception The following shall occur for instrument technology such as ICP or ICP MS with validated techniques from manufacturers or meth ods employing standardization with a zero point and a single point calibration standard NELAC 13 2 1 8 1 Prior to the analysis of samples the zero point and single point calibration must be ana lyzed and the linear range of the instrument must be established by analyzing a series of standards one of which must be at the lowest quantitation level Sample results within the established linear range will not require data qualifier flags 13 2 1 8 2 Zero point and single point calibration standard must be analyzed with each analytical batch 13 2 1 8 3 A standard corresponding to the limit of quantitation must be analyzed with each analyti cal batch and must be established accept
55. deviation from the Work Plan during a sampling event and the reasons for the deviation will be documented Information that is recorded during field activities and sampling events is described in SOP 120 Documents that will be produced are described in Section 9 0 The laboratory data report package will include a written and electronic submission according to routine practices employed by the laboratory The narrative description will include a description of any QC issues encountered and corrective action taken Original copies of laboratory testing records data sheets COCs will be stored and maintained at AIC Copies of project records including documentation of email and telephone communication among project team members will be maintained at FTN Associates Ltd 3 Innwood Circle Suite 220 Little Rock AR 72211 7 7 REVISED August 1 2008 Table 7 3 List of constituents with reporting levels exceeding screening levels Water Soil Reporting Reporting Level Reporting Level Reporting Level Level Exceeds Exceeds Exceeds One or Exceeds ___ Residential Water Regulation No 2 More Soil Constituent MCL HHMSSL Acute Criteria HHMSSL Benzo a anthracene X X Benzo a pyrene X X X Benzo b fluoranthene X X Benzo k fluoranthene X Bis 2 chloroethyl ether or Dichloroethyl X X ether Chlorobenzilate X Dibenz ah anthracene X X 3 3 Dichlorobenzidi
56. for clarification and overseeing correction of final reports if necessary At a minimum one report per analyst per year will be performed Data audits include spot checking of manual integrations to determine if they are appropriate and docu mented Errors found in client reports are revised and the revisions sent to the clients 14 4 6 Spot Assessments are conducted on an as needed basis generally as a follow up to specific is sues such as client complaints data assessment concerns corrective actions control charts proficiency testing results data audits or external audit issues Spot assessments are focused on a specific issue The frequency report format distribution and time frames are tailored to address the nature of the issue Page 45 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 14 CORPORATION ae LABORATORIES Revision 19 May 23 2007 14 4 7 Audit Frequency Audit Type Performed By Frequency System Audits Director of Quality Assurance Annual Laboratory Dept Data Audits Director of Quality Assurance One data package analyst or analyst group year Spot Assessment DQA or designee As needed to monitor specific issues Proficiency Coordinated by DQA Two samples year program Testing DMRQA Study As needed to assess laboratory analyst performance 14 4 8 Number of Audits Required Audit Semi annually Description 2 Standards Reagents Properly
57. i e one casing volume and record on the sampling form if the well is to be purged for sampling Reel in the water level meter tape and remove it from the well Replace the well cap and secure the lock Decontaminate equipment in accordance with SOP 130 Decontamination of Drilling and Sampling Equipment after each measurement and store it appropriately for transport to the next well site Make measurements at a set of wells in as short a time frame as possible Complete all appropriate data forms and sign all pages 5 0 RECORDS The Field Team Leader FTL is responsible for maintaining permanent QC sample records 5 1 5 2 Sample Collection Record or Water Level Elevation Data Sheet 6 0 ATTACHMENTS Attachment A Water Level Elevation Data Sheet and Completion Instructions 3 of 4 Revision 1 September 2005 WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS SOP 610 7 0 REFERENCES 7 1 ASTM 2002 Standard Test Method for Determining Subsurface Liquid Levels in a Borehole or Monitoring Well Observation Well ASTM D4750 ASTM Philadelphia PA 4 of 4 Revision 1 September 2005 Water Level Elevation Data Sheet Field Area Measured By Signature Page__ of_ Well ID Date Time MPD MPE DTW WLE LMPGS DTW BGS Comments ft above msl ft ft above msl ft ft MPD Measuring Point Description WLE Water Level Elevation MPE Measuring Poin
58. method and field blanks The trip blank must remain in the cooler at all times during sampling and sample transport to the laboratory One trip blank will accompany each cooler containing samples for VOC analysis Matrix Spike Matrix Spike Duplicates MS MSD MS MSD will be used to measure the precision and accuracy of the laboratory s analytical equipment A sufficient volume will be collected and sent to the laboratory for analysis such that an MS MSD sample can be analyzed for every 20 media samples 7 13 REVISED August 1 2008 7 2 6 1 Laboratory QA QC Procedures The contract laboratory will follow its own internal QA QC procedures for method blanks duplicates and laboratory control samples LCSs The laboratory maintains written documentation of these QA QC procedures Applicable portions of the laboratory QA QC Manual for AIC are provided in Appendix D Precision of laboratory analyses will be measured using analytical duplicate results The RPD for two concentrations C and C2 will be calculated as abs C5 BAD 2 100 Accuracy of laboratory analyses is evaluated by the comparison of the percent recovery of the spiked sample analysis and or LCS of known concentrations to control limits Control limits have been established for each method of analysis see Appendix D Completeness C of the analytical effort can be calculated as follows C V T X 100 where C complet
59. of the seal 4 4 2 Fill the annulus between the well casing and borehole above the filter pack with a bentonite seal at least 2 ft thick 3 of 6 Revision 2 June 2007 MONITORING WELL CONSTRUCTION SOP 510 4 5 4 6 4 of 6 4 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 If the seal is above the water table hydrate according to manufacturer s specifications or 12 hours which ever is greater using deionized water For wells deeper than 30 ft bentonite backfill material can be pumped or poured through a tremie pipe Measure the distance to the top of the seal with a weighted tape to verify that the proper thickness of the seal has been placed in the annulus 4 4 6 Repeat application and verification as needed Annular Well Seal 4 5 1 Ifa cement grout annular seal is to be installed use Portland cement The 4 5 2 4 5 3 4 5 4 grout must be mixed thoroughly with 2 to 5 bentonite powder to produce a nonshrinking seal Mix solid with water approximately 6 gallons to each 94 Ib bag of cement to make pumpable slurry Pour or pump grout into the annulus through a tremie pipe Slowly withdraw the auger as the annulus fills Below a depth of 10 ft grout must be pumped to the bottom of the open annulus until undiluted grout flows from the annulus at the ground surface Grout may be poured directly into the annulus if it is dry and the top of the bentonite seal is readily visible generally 5 ft or less After the grout has set about 24
60. on the pump The pump discharges fine particulate material that moves into the well Raise and lower the pump within the screened interval Bailing may be combined with pumping for the most efficient well development Note and record the volumes of water produced as pumping bailing proceeds Note the initial color clarity and any obvious odor of the water Well development shall continue until the water removed is visible free of silt and sand and turbidity readings stabilize at levels of less that 10 NTU or cannot be improved If turbidity levels cannot be improved purge a minimum of five casing volumes of water before stopping well development If it is determined that the criteria for well development can not be met regardless of the amount of pumping consult an FTN Senior Hydrogeologist to evaluate alternative procedures as appropriate 2 of 3 Revision 1 September 2005 WELL DEVELOPMENT SOP 511 5 0 RECORDS The Field Geologist is responsible for maintaining permanent QC sample records Record measured data and observations in the project field notebook 6 0 REFERENCES 6 1 EPA 1991 Handbook of Suggested Practices for the Design and Installation of Ground water Monitoring Wells Environmental Monitoring System Laboratory Office of Research and Development 6 2 1986 RCRA Ground Water Monitoring Technical Enforcement Guidance Document OSWER Washington D C 3 of 3 Revision 1 September 2005 WATER LEVEL MEA
61. pep pe ir ADEQ Review of Phase 1 Work Plan SEER EEE EERE EEE Phase 1 Field Investigations Phase 1 Sample Analysis and Phase 1 Data Review 1 Data Review e po Se Plan Budget Preparation a IIM IIIo IS Phase 2 Work Plan Budget Phase 2 Phase 2 Field Investigations Phase 2 Field Investigations Ooo l T Phase 2 Sample Analysis and Validation Data Data Evaluation L Lj 3 ep p 3f e Evaluation mm j Post Closure Work SS LT Activities E Report _ LL LLL LLL LLL LLL Progress Repos A Jel Le ee E me 10 2 REVISED August 1 2008 11 0 REFERENCES CITED ADEQ 2005a Memorandum to Steve Martin from Gerald Delavan dated February 16 2005 Status of Parsons Class 1 Landfill Site Washington County AR ADEQ 2005b Memorandum to Gerald Delavan from Bill Sadler dated October 17 2005 Groundwater Sampling at Parson s Landfill Northwest Arkansas Waste Management Class 1 Landfill AIC 2007 Quality Assurance Quality Control Manual Revision 19 May 23 2007 American Interplex Corporation Bolyard S E 2007 Migration of Landfill Contaminants in a Tilted Block Mantled Karst Setting in Northwestern Arkansas A thesis submitted in partial fulfillment of the requirements for the degree of Master of Science in Geology University of Arkansas at Fayet
62. programs and testing purposes based on historical data measurements of parameters matrixes and analytical methods Data should be reproducible under similar conditions whether generated by American Interplex Corporation or another laboratory Automatically LIMS will evaluate data from a client s site and notify the Labo ratory Director and Director of Quality Assurance that a statistical difference has occurred The data is than further evaluated and in some instances the result is confirmed prior to releasing the data 15 6 Uncertainty Every measurement has error that is ultimately unknown and unknowable The description of this un known error is measurement uncertainty In most cases American Interplex Corporation AIC uses well recognized test methods which specify limits to major sources of uncertainty e g a balance accu rate to 0 001 g and provide reporting instructions so that the reported data do not give the wrong im pression of the uncertainty of the test results In rare instances AIC may be requested to provide an es timate of the uncertainty of a test result In those instances one the following options with preference given to the first option will be utilized 15 6 1 Estimation of Uncertainty using Laboratory Control Samples This method uses the limits of historical LCS data to estimate results to a 99 confidence interval using the following equation 100 c RY 1 L R c Where c measured concentration of the
63. quality assurance project plan QAPP has been prepared according to EPA Requirements for Quality Assurance Project Plans USEPA QA R 5 USEPA 240 B 01 003 U S Environmental Protection Agency Office of Environmental Information Washington DC March 2001 This document will be used to ensure that environmental and related data collected compiled and or generated for this project are of the type quantity and quality required for their intended purpose Approvals A P d T LZ r A tae E UV ev i August 1 2008 Paul Crawford PE PG Date Project Manager FTN Associates Ltd P MALO August 1 2008 Dianne Lincicome PE PG Date Quality Assurance Coordinator FTN Associates Ltd 7 1 REVISED August 1 2008 John Overbey Date Laboratory Project Manager American Interplex Corporation Karen White Date Laboratory Quality Assurance Officer American Interplex Corporation 2 August 1 2008 Curtis Nunn PG Date Field Sampling Leader FTN Associates Ltd Alan Nye PhD Date Risk Evaluation Project Manager CTEH Bryan Leamons PE Date ADEQ Project Manager ADEQ Solid Waste Management Division 7 1 2 Table of Contents The table of contents for the QAPP is provided on pages ii and iii of this Phase 1 Work Plan 7 2 REVISED August 1 2008 7 1 3 Distribution List This document will be distributed to the following ADEQ FTN CTEH and
64. requested Labels shall be completed with black waterproof ink and secured to sample containers with clear tape as necessary 3 5 Chain of Custody COC 3 5 1 3 5 2 3 5 3 3 5 4 The FTL or designee is responsible for sample custody from the time of sample collection to receipt at the laboratory or until samples are shipped by commercial carrier Sample custody is documented on the lower part of the COC form Attachment D A COC form shall be included with each ice chest shipped to the laboratory Complete COC forms in waterproof ink Corrections are made using a single pen line through errors and the error is initialed and dated and the correction is entered Erasures or correction fluid use are not permitted Information recorded on COC forms includes 3of5 Revision 1 September 2005 SAMPLE CONTROL AND FIELD DOCUMENTATION SOP 120 Samples collected and corresponding laboratory analyses Time and date of sample Sample number Type of sample Sampler s initials Preservatives used Special instructions and Relinquisher s signature dates and time 9o Oe oops 3 5 5 The FTL or individual not completing the form shall review the COC form and confirm sample label information matches the COC document 3 5 6 Onecopy of the COC form is retained by the sampling team and the other copy is sealed in a ziplock bag attached to the inside lid of the ice chest in accordance with SOP 110 Sample Handli
65. sample is still available and within holding time criteria the sample will be re submitted for analysis The resultant data may be reported to the client verbally or in a written revised report 15 8 4 1 3 If during the review process a determinant error with the analytical process 1s detected and the sample is still available and within holding time criteria the sample will be re submitted for analysis The resultant data will be reported to the client in a written revised report 15 8 4 1 4 In the event that the error is not an isolated case the laboratory shall notify all affected clients in writing that the initial data submitted is erroneous If sample retention and holding times al low the sample s will re analyzed and an amendment to the report will be forthcoming 15 8 42 In the event that the laboratory compliance with its own policies and procedures the rules of an accrediting agency or the validity of the data is questioned the Director of Quality Assurance will instigate and conduct an internal audit of the areas involved and document the complaint audit findings and recommendation using a Corrective and Preventative Action Report 15 8 43 Information Components of the Customer Non Conformance Report generated by LIMS The following information is provided description of out of control problem dates date recognized date occurred date corrected and sample control numbers affected cause of problem known or sus pected co
66. shake the container to expose the soil to the air trapped in the container Allow the sealed container to set for a minimum of 5 minutes depending on ambient temperatures while vapors equilibrate Measure the vapors present within the sample bag headspace by inserting the probe of the PID in a small opening in the bag or through foil on the jar Record all readings in the field logbook Record readings as ppm Measure and record background readings The background reading is the reading of ambient air outside the sample container Under no circumstances immerse the probe tip assembly in fluid In some field applications with the exception of the probe s inlet and exhaust wrap the PID in clear plastic to prevent contamination and to prevent water from getting inside in the event of precipitation PID screening may require initially filling more sample bottles than will be submitted for analysis and discarding extra samples after headspace analysis 13 0 RECORDS The Field Geologist or designee is responsible for maintaining permanent QC sample records Note all visible contamination odor PID measurements or any observed evidence of contamination in the sample Log subsurface boreholes in accordance with SOP 410 General Drilling Operations in Unconsolidated Materials Using a Hollow Stem Auger HSA or Direct Push Technology DPT 6 of 7 Revision 1 September 2005 SOIL SAMPLING SOP 310 13 1 Sample Collection Record
67. specific work plan or sampling and analysis plan SAP Use the following SOPs in conjunction with SOP 320 e SOP 321 Well Purging e SOP 322 Field Testing Using the HydroLab MiniSonde or DataSonde with a Flow Through Cell e SOP 610 Water Level Measurements e SOP 110 Sample Handling Packaging and Shipment e SOP 120 Sample Control and Field Documentation e SOP 130 Decontamination of Drilling and Sampling Equipment e SOP 140 Management of Investigation Derived Wastes 3 0 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 3 1 Use groundwater purging and sampling equipment peristaltic bladder or submersible pumps bailers constructed of only non reactive non leachable materials that are compatible with the environment and the selected analytes 3 2 Water level measuring device 3 3 J How through cell if applicable 3 4 Flow measurement supplies if applicable 3 5 Sample containers and preservatives 3 6 Parameter Meters 3 7 Photoionization Detector PID if applicable lof3 Revision 1 September 2005 GROUNDWATER SAMPLING SOP 320 3 8 3 9 Personal protective clothing and equipment Field logbook 3 10 Cooler with ice 4 0 PROCEDURE 4 1 4 2 4 3 44 4 5 4 6 2 of 3 Conduct Initial Inspection 4 1 1 Verify the identification of the monitoring well by examining markings sign plates placards or other designations 4 2 Remove the well cover and remove all standing water around the top of the wel
68. spreadsheets will be traceable to original data sheets through location ID date and time 2 Manual data entry is verified by personnel not involved in data entry Initials of the persons performing data entry and verification are included in spreadsheet documentation 7 4 2 Verification and Validation Methods The FTN QA Coordinator or her designee will review the field and laboratory data and associated documentation e g original field sheets laboratory reports calibration forms COC 7 23 REVISED August 1 2008 forms etc to ensure compliance with the criteria in Section 7 2 Any deficiencies will be reported to the FTN Project Manager as soon as they are discovered Appropriate corrective action including that already in place will be discussed Corrective action will then be initiated or modified as needed and will be verified by the FTN QA Coordinator The ADEQ Project Manager and the AIC QA Officer will be notified if necessary of any deficiency that might compromise the quality of the data 7 4 3 Reconciliation with User Requirements The results of the QA QC review described in Section 7 4 5 will be reviewed by the FTN Project Manager to assess the usability of the data in light of any QA QC issues identified for the intended purpose In general data that are collected such that verification and validation criteria are met will be deemed useable for the intended purpose If data quality indicators do not meet
69. tasks The approved Phase 1 scope of work includes a site reconnaissance one round of surface water sampling surface soil sampling one round of groundwater sampling at existing monitoring wells leachate sampling and conducting an aerial survey of the site Following a review of Phase 1 activities and results a detailed work plan and budget for the Phase 2 field investigations will be developed The following general tasks are anticipated to be conducted during the Phase 2 investigation but may be modified after initial data is evaluated Hydrogeologic investigation Phase 2 groundwater sampling Explosive gas monitoring Site survey Investigation derived waste IDW management and Geotechnical testing gun ES 5 1 REVISED August 1 2008 6 0 SITE ASSESSMENT SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS PLAN This section describes the tasks that will be implemented as part of closure and post closure activities fro the Parsons Landfill site This section includes a discussion of field sampling protocols selection of analytical parameters and specific QA protocols Appendix A contains standard operating procedures SOPs for activities described in this sampling and analysis plan FTN will gain access to the facility as ADEQ s representative A site specific health and safety plan for work at the Parsons site is included in Appendix B Table 6 1 is a summary of the samples that will be collected and analyzed 6 1 Selection of Analytical Para
70. the overall organization of the monitoring and evaluation that will be conducted by FTN under contract with ADEQ The project management quality program and water quality sampling activities are included in this QAPP Duties and responsibilities of personnel for various aspects of the sampling analysis and reporting process are described along with an implementation schedule Laboratory testing and QA QC activities will be coordinated and managed according to SOPs and the internal QA QC plan currently in place at AIC A copy of the AIC QA QC Manual AIC 2007 is available in its entirety upon request Applicable portions are included in Appendix D AIC will perform all analytical services The organizational aspects of a program provide the framework for conducting tasks The organizational structure and function can also facilitate project performance and adherence to QC procedures and QA requirements Key project roles are filled by those persons responsible for ensuring the collection of valid data and the routine assessment of the data for precision and accuracy as well as the data users and the persons responsible for approving and accepting final products and deliverables The program organizational chart is presented on Figure 7 1 and includes relationships and lines of communication among all participants and data users The responsibilities of these persons are described in Table 7 2 7 1 5 Problem Definition Background This project wil
71. the project s requirements the data may be discarded and re sampling may occur The FTN Project Manager will evaluate the cause of the failure 1f possible and make the decision whether or not to discard the data and re sample If the failure is related to data quality or to the methods of analysis calibration and maintenance techniques will be reassessed as identified by the appropriate laboratory and or field personnel If the failure is associated with the sample collection and re sampling is needed the samplers will be re trained 7 24 REVISED August 1 2008 8 0 RISK EVALUATION CTEH will conduct a screening risk assessment for all soil groundwater seep spring surface water and sediment sample results Surface soil sampling results will be compared to USEPA Region 6 HHMSSLs for residential property In this screening assessment the maximum detected concentration of a chemical in surface soil will be compared to the residential HHMSSL In addition for inorganic constituents soil concentrations will be compared to typical background concentrations In the absence of site specific background results regional background concentrations will be used from available sources Generally if the maximum detected concentration of a chemical in soil does not exceed the residential HHMSSL groundwater protection soil screening level or background further risk evaluation is not warranted Concentrations of chemicals in groundwater will be
72. total metals analysis Calcium and magnesium will also be measured to assess hardness for comparing results to Regulation No 2 criteria 6 1 4 Sediment Sediment samples will be analyzed for Regulation No 22 Appendix 2 constituents except VOCs and iron manganese sulfate chloride and TOC 6 1 5 Groundwater Phase groundwater samples will be submitted for laboratory analysis of Regulation No 22 Appendix 2 constituents and iron manganese TDS sulfate chloride TOC pH and specific conductivity dissolved concentrations will be measured for metals with detections from total metals analysis Phase 2 groundwater samples will be submitted for laboratory analysis of A modified list of Appendix 2 constituents that is based on the results of Phase 1 sampling of surface water groundwater and leachate Tron Manganese TDS e Sulfate 6 3 REVISED August 1 2008 e Chloride and e TOC 6 1 6 Leachate Leachate samples will be submitted for laboratory analysis of Regulation No 22 Appendix 2 constituents and iron manganese TDS sulfate chloride TOC and pH dissolved concentrations will be measured for metals with detections from total metals analysis 6 2 Sampling Locations and Field Sampling Methodology Fieldwork will include surface soil surface water sediment groundwater and leachate sampling as well as non sampling activities The performance objective is to collect representative sa
73. where a representative chemical related substance or mixture can be used 1322 2 Instrument calibration must be performed at the beginning and end of each analytical batch except if an internal standard is used only one verification needs to be performed at the begin ning of the analytical batch Page 37 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 13 CORPORATION Revision 19 LABORATORIES a May 23 2007 13 2 2 3 Instrument calibration verification must be performed whenever it is expected that the analytical system may be out of calibration or might not meet the verification criteria 13 2 2 4 Instrument calibration must be performed if the time period for calibration or the most previous calibration has expired 13 2 2 5 Instrument calibration verification must be performed for analytical systems that contain calibration verification requirement 13 2 2 6 Sufficient raw data records must be retained to permit reconstruction of the continuing instrument calibration e g test method instrument analysis date each analyte concentration and re sponse calibration curve or response factor or any unique equations or coefficients used to convert in strument responses into concentrations Continuing calibration verification records must explicitly con nect the continuing verification cata to the initial instrument calibration 13 227 Cr
74. 0 004 44E 01 4 4 00 1 9 00 5 0E04 1 4E 04 2 7E 03 HCH technical orDelta BHC 6087331 1 3260 32E 00 14E 00 1 0E04 27E 04 6 0E 03 DDD O 72548 8080A 0280131 0 00000 24E 00 24E 01 11 01 amp 0E 0 5 3E 05 7 4E 03 DDE J 72559 0 19774 0 00150 _ 004 17E 00 17E 01 7 8E 00 3 0E 00 1 0E 04 2 7E 03 DDT O 50293 808A 0 19774 0 002500 amp 012 11 17E 00 17E 01 7 8E 00 2 0E 00 1 7E 04 8 0E 03 Dieldin CEC 60571 808A lEndosufan S 959988 AJ et X Jp t13E04 9 4E 09 Endosufanl 33213659 sosia JA J X X 13E04 27E03 Endosulfan Sulfate 1031 5078 80834 oe A 2086 04 44E02 72 20 8 8081A 10 950000 0 000020 006 0 18 1 8 01 6 1E 02 2 1 02 5 0E 02 4 1E 05 4 0E 03 Endrin Aldehyde 1 74219334 808834 0 000420 023 BE 05 1 5 02 1 1 1 53E 02 _6 3E 01 21E 0 3 0 02 61E05 5 3 02 IMethoxychlor CT 72435 8081A 4000 182 500000 0 002000 1 80 3 1E 02 1 0E 04 34 03 amp 0E 00 14E 04 1 2E 01 olychlorinated biphenyls PCBs
75. 000 1 1 0E 00 1 0E 01 TDS na SM 2540C 9 400000 10 na na na na na na Total Cyanide 57 12 5 9014 200 000 0 730 0 001300 0 01 1 2E 03 1 3E 02 1 0E 01 Total Organic Carbon TOC 9060 0 041000 1 Metals Note Concentrations in mg L Note Concentrations in mg Kg Antimony 7440 36 0 6020 6010B 0 006 0 146 0 000035 0 001 3 1E 01 8 2E 02 4 5E 02 3 0E 01 3 91E 01 1 0E 00 Arsenic noncancer endpoint 7440 38 2 6020 6010B 0 010 0 000950 0 001 2 2E 01 6 1E 02 2 8E 02 6 11E 01 5 0E 00 Arsenic cancer endpoint 7440 38 2 6020 6010B 0 010 0 0004 0 000950 0 001 3 9E 01 3 8E 00 1 8E 00 1 0E 00 6 11E 01 3 0E 01 Barium 7440 39 3 6020 6010B 2 000 73 0 000220 0 002 1 6E 04 1 0E 05 1 0E 05 8 2E 01 1 6E 02 2 0E 01 Beryllium 7440 41 7 6020 6010B 0 004 0 073 0 000026 0 0003 0 004 1 6E 02 2 2E 03 2 2E 03 3 0E 00 2 5E 03 3 0E 02 Cadmium 7440 43 9 6020 6010B 0 005 0 185 0 000026 0 001 TES 3 9E 01 1 0E 03 5 6E 02 4 0E 01 1 9E 02 4 0E 01 Chromium Total 7440 47 83 6020 6010B 0 100 0 000026 0 003 ii 2 1 E402 4 5E 02 5 0 02 2 0E 00 8 0E 02 7 0E 01 Cobalt 7440 48 4 6020 6010B 0 73 0 000250 0 003 9 0E 02 1 9E 03 2 1E 03 7 6E 02 7 0E 01 Copper 7440 50 8 6020 6010B 1 300 1 36 0 000640 0 003 Thr 2 9E 03 7 6E 04 4 2E 04 7 5E 02 6 0E 01 Iron 7439 89 6 6020 6010B 25 6 0 002700 0 007 5 5E 04 1 0E 05 1 0E 05 5 4E 02 7 0E 01 Lead 7439 92 1 6020 6010B 0 015 0 015 0 000073 0 001 a 4 0E 02 8 0E 02 8 0E 02 3 8E 01 4 0E 00 Manganese 7439 96 5 6020 6010B 1 7 0 000420 0 002 3 5E 03 4 7E
76. 3 0 37 4 0 65 5 1 02 6 1 47 12 5 88 4 5 Record all measurements and calculations in the field records 4 6 Purge monitoring wells by using the volume of water Section 5 0 and or field parameter stabilization technique Section 6 The selection of the purging technique and equipment is dependent on the hydrogeologic properties of the aquifer especially depth to groundwater and hydraulic conductivity The intent of proper purging is to stabilize the water level in the well and minimize the hydraulic stress to the hydrogeologic formation Every attempt must be made to match the pumping rate with the recharge rate of the well before evaluating the purging completion criteria 5 of 10 Revision 1 September 2005 WELL PURGING SOP 321 5 0 VOLUME OF WATER PURGING TECHNIQUE 5 1 Measuring the purge volume The volume of water that is removed during purging must be recorded Therefore you must measure the volume during the purging operation 5 2 Collect the water in a graduated container and multiply the number of times the container was emptied by the volume of the container or 5 3 Estimate the volume based on pumping rate This technique may be used only if the pumping rate is constant Determine the pumping rate by measuring the amount of water that is pumped for a fixed period of time or use a flow meter Calculate the amount of water that is discharged per minute Measured amount D Total time in minutes
77. 4 Slowly lower the bailer to the appropriate depth Upon retrieval the two check valves seat preventing water from escaping or entering the bailer 5 Rinse the sampling device with ample amounts of site water prior to collecting the first sample 6 Fill the individual sample bottles via the discharge tube Sample bottles must be handled as described in previous sections of this SOP 5 10 Automatic samplers are used when sites are to be sampled at frequent intervals or when a continuous sample is required Automatic samplers are frequently used in situations where sampling equipment is deployed on site for a long term This situation is not anticipated for most site assessment work therefore procedures for using automatic samplers are beyond the scope of the SOP 6 0 RECORDS The Field Team Leader FTL is responsible for maintaining permanent QC sample records 6 1 Sample Collection Record 6 3 Daily Log 6 4 Chain of Custody documentation 7 0 REFERENCES 7 1 EPA Region 4 1996 Environmental Investigations Standard Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual May 1996 6 of 6 Revision 1 September 2005 GENERAL DRILLING OPERATIONS IN UNCONSOLIDATED SOP 410 MATERIALS USING A HOLLOW STEM AUGER HSA OR DIRECT PUSH TECHNOLOGY DPT 1 0 PURPOSE This Standard Operating Procedure SOP specifies methods for drilling operations using a hollow stem auger HSA or Direct Push Technology DPT for subsurface investigations
78. 4 9 Abandon DPT probe holes as appropriate for the location Often times this involves backfilling with bentonite chips 4 10 Collect and manage all wastes as specified in SOP 140 Management of Investigation Derived Wastes 4 11 Patch the pavement with an appropriate material similar to surrounding materials 4 12 abandonment procedures for temporary cased borings will be the same as that for boreholes however the initial step will be to completely remove the casing and annulus materials from the boring 4 13 Mark boring locations with a clearly labeled state pin flag or spray paint that indicates the site and borehole number 5 0 RECORDS The Field Geologist is responsible for logging boreholes and classifying soils in accordance with ASTM D2488 and the Unified Soil Classification System Lithologic logging will be recorded on borings logs Attachment A For consistency all descriptions should use the following order and style e Formation name if known USCS code Soil type including secondary components silty CLAY Soil color Consistency for cohesive soils density for non cohesive soil Plasticity for fine grain clay and silt non plastic low medium high Sorting and grain size for sands and gravel Structure homogeneous stratified or laminated blocky fissured Miscellaneous descriptors roots nodules odors particle angularity Relative moisture content dry moist wet HCL reaction if any weak
79. 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 Section 15 Revision 19 May 23 2007 CORPORATION LABORATORIES j AMERICAN INTERPLEX DATA ASSESSMENT AND VALIDATION PROCESS QUALITY ASSURANCE QUALITY CONTROL Homogonize Sampie Representative of Sample Matrix Sample Analysis Prepare Sampte Prepare Precision Samples Duplicate Analysis 20 of samples submitted Prepare Accuracy Sampies Matrix Spike Matrix Spike Duplicate 20 of samples sumbitted Lab Quality Contro Sample 5 and QC samples Historical data RELATIVE PERCENT DIFFERENCE RPD C A B A B 2 100 PERCENT RECOVERY 1 R SSR SR SA 190 Compare data to statistically generated controi limits for analysis g Goto Establish YES of NO of NO lt 20 points Contro Data Points Data Points Limits 20 40 307 Control Limit Evaluate Page 62 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com REJECT DATA POINT STATISTICAL ANALYSIS AVERAGE of RPD or XR Xs X X2 X3 Xn n STANDARD DEVIAT ION 5 Z 72 1 REVIEW FOR OUTLIERS Grubbs Test 95 Confidence Level Rank Data Lowest X1 Highest Xn GRUBBS TEST Minimum Value T X X1 5 YES Critical Table Value gt GRUBBS TEST Max
80. 8270C 292 000000 0 869000 50 4 9E 02 1 6E 04 5 5E 03 5 8E 02 3 3E 00 lp Phenylenediamine 106 50 3 8270 56 38 2 82700 Pentachlorobenzene 608 93 5 82700 2920000 1000000 w0 79601 16E 03 55E 02 66E01 6 6E 01 Phenacetin 62442 soc 6935 000000 10 000000 10 219 000000 10 000000 10 I 0 560263 0 534000 tT f 1000000 io OT 1 2E 04 10E 05 10E 05 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 3 7E 02 12bE 04 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 1 9E 00 22E 01 74E 00 6 6E 01 6 6 01 __ oeeo amp 69Eo01 28E02 _6 6E 01 Lo n jJ 108 95 2 8270C 109500000 051000 io 1 8E 04 1 0E 05 1 0E 05 5 0E 00 3 4E 02 6 6E 01 Po 298 02 2 82700 23950 58 5 82700 f 100000 tO 10 000000 f sd 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 DL 129 00 0 8270 182 500000 045600 10 2 3E 03 54E 04 3 2E 04 2 1 02 3 1E 02 6 6E 01 94 59 7 82700 sym Trinitrobenzene 99 35 4 82700 10 000000 10000000 Of sd 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 sd 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 1 Po 1 2 4 5 Tetrachlorobenzene 95 94 3 8270C 10950000 10 000000 10 1 8E 01 6 1E 02 21E 02 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 2 3 4 6 Tetrachlorophenol 58 90 2 8270C 1095 000000 0 77300 10 1 8bE 03 6 1E 04 21E 04 5 2E 02
81. AFT April 22 2008 responsible for compliance with all applicable standards and regulations FTN requires subcontractor s personnel to be adequately trained in the performance of their duties In regard to site safety policies FTN and subcontractor s will receive specific information from the Arkansas Department of Environmental Quality ADEQ as necessary 1 2 DRAFT April 22 2008 2 0 SITE DESCRIPTION 2 1 Site Location and Background The Northwest Arkansas Waste Management Inc Parsons Landfill is a closed facility including both Class 1 and Class 4 landfills that had a history of operational problems leachate problems and groundwater issues The Class landfill was a trench fill operation and the Class 4 landfill was a ravine fill operation The Landfill is located on approximately 140 acres about 3 miles east of Springdale and about 1 mile north of US 412 in Washington County Arkansas Problems associated with groundwater and surface water impacts inadequate soil cover lack of vegetative cover erosion differential settling ponding of water and methane gas generation have been noted in recent years by ADEQ ADEQ is conducting this site investigation to 1 Determine to what extent the release of contaminants has impacted the subject property and surrounding property and groundwater surface water in the vicinity 2 Determine if landfill gas LFG is migrating offsite Determine the risks to human heal
82. AIC staff involved in this project Table 7 1 Table 7 1 Distribution list for the QAPP Individual Phone Number Mailing Address ADEQ 501 682 0601 5301 Northshore Drive North Little Rock AR 72118 5317 FTN Associates Ltd 501 225 7779 3 Innwood Circle Suite 220 Bryan Leamons PE ADEQ Project Manager Paul Crawford PE PG Bee ee Little Rock AR 72211 Alan Nye PhD CTEH Risk Evaluation Project Manager 501 801 8540 5120 Northshore Drive CTEH North Little Rock AR 72118 FTN Associates Ltd 501 225 7779 3 Innwood Circle Suite 220 Little Rock AR 72211 FTN Associates Ltd 479 571 3334 124 W Sunbridge Suite 3 Fayetteville AR 72703 Dianne Lincicome PE PG FTN QA Coordinator Curtis Nunn PG FTN Field Sampling Leader John Overbey AIC Laboratory Project Manager 501 224 5060 8600 Kanis Road AIC Little Rock AR 72204 Karen White AIC Laboratory QA Officer 501 224 5060 8600 Kanis Road AIC Little Rock AR 72204 Additional distribution to staff involved in this project will be conducted as necessary 7 1 4 Project Task Organization 7 1 4 1 Purpose Background The purpose of the project organization is to provide involved parties with a clear understanding of the role that each plays in the project and to provide lines of authority and reporting for the project 7 3 REVISED August 1 2008 7 1 4 2 Roles and Responsibilities This section describes
83. ARD EVALUATION printesa a oaa eise ius tebt 4 1 41 Chemical Hazards cr b etia ede eu EES 4 4 2 Physical and Biological Hazards iater tee dert edente tune ero Phe sas ese epe qnoa 4 1 4 3 Heat Stress Me 4 2 old EXDOSUIB se e utt qua fubdit ou Duo RN EY ho idi USt eaa NETUS 4 3 5 0 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT recette teen 5 1 QU EMERGENCY INFORMATION eli t aa dad pared 6 2 6 1 Emergency Response oue t dee eat e eee 6 2 6 2 Hospitals Leod quaerat Gee tiis fai tatu oe tue 6 2 G3 Emergency NOUPICAUOT cien eet bed eset dit 6 3 LIST OF ATTACHMENTS ATTACHMENT 1 Site Safety Plan Approval Sign Off Form ATTACHMENT 2 Scope of Work Activities ATTACHMENT 3 Site Safety Plan Amendment Sheet ATTACHMENT 4 Route to Northwest Medical Center in Springdale Arkansas ATTACHMENTS Accident Report Form DRAFT April 22 2008 1 0 HEALTH AND SAFETY PROGRAM 1 4 Purpose FTN Associates Ltd FTN project personnel and subcontractor s will comply with rules regulations and standards pertaining to occupational safety and health and are required to adhere to this Site Safety Plan SSP The purpose of this SSP is to outline the precautions that will be taken to minimize potential exposures accidents and physical injuries that may occur during onsite activities and adverse conditions and to ens
84. ATORIES May 23 2007 15 8 2 6 3 Recalibrate the instrument with freshly prepared reagents and re analyze the samples 15 8 2 6 4 Evaluate the data and sample behavior and investigate any possible chemical interfer ences 15 8 2 6 5 Check instrument for possible maintenance requirements 15 8 2 6 6 Seek additional help from other analysts or provide additional training for laboratory per sonnel 15 8 2 6 7 Perform a system audit to evaluate corrective and preventative action measures 15 8 2 7 Corrective action implementation depends entirely upon the type of analysis the extent of the error and whether the error is determinant or not Examples of determinant error are instrument failure replacement of contaminated extraction solvent re extraction and analysis of a complete batch of samples due to contamination and re calculation of data Non determinant errors will result in a complete re analysis of sample batches provided holding times are not exceeded In all instances the corrective action must be determined on a case by case basis All corrective actions will be documented and a compilation of known out of control situations and resolutions of problems will be established 15 8 2 8 If an out of control sample is determined and the data is to be reported the sample asso ciated with the data is to be qualified on the final report with the phrase the quality control data associ ated with insert parameter failed to meet acceptance crite
85. AX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 10 CORPORATION Revision 19 LABORATORIES May 23 2007 Samples are distributed to the appropriate laboratory or kept refrigerated until they undergo analysis unless otherwise specified Samples are stored in one of three refrigerators depending on the type of analysis The temperature of each sample storage unit is monitored daily and the data recorded Upon completion of all analyses samples and sample extracts are retained in refrigerated storage on holding shelves untill the fourteenth day from the report date unless other arrangements have been made in advance At this time the samples are either returned to the client or disposed of according to ap proved disposal practices Documentation is maintained from initial receipt through final disposal This ensures that an accurate history of the sample is generated Page 25 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 11 CORPORATION Revision 19 LABORATORIES May 23 2007 11 0 APPROVED ANALYTICAL METHODS 11 1 National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System The methods used in the analyses of National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System NPDES moni toring required by the Clean Water Act of 1977 are listed in 40 CFR 136 11 2 Safe Drinking Water Act The EPA has established maximum contamination levels in national primary drinking wat
86. Associates Ltd personnel are hereby permitted to act as our authorized agent for the following purposes 1 Sign waste profile sheets shipping manifest and contracts to dispose recycle and or transport waste 2 Sign recertifications and or amendments to waste profile sheets FTN Associates Ltd will notify us prior to any action authorized above and will provide us with copies of any documents bearing our name to which amendments or signatures have been made under this authorization Name print Title Signature Company Form SOP 140 3 Generator Broker Authorization Revision 1 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLES SOP 150 PURPOSE This Standard Operating Procedure SOP describes the requirements for the collection of field quality control QC samples to ensure the reliability and validity of field and laboratory data This procedure is applicable to sampling and analysis plans SAPs that include the collection of environmental samples SCOPE 2 1 Sampling procedures outlined in the SAPs are applied to field QC samples in the same way they are applied to regular field samples 2 2 Field QC sample containers must be labeled and transported and the samples analyzed in a manner identical to all other samples taken at a site Once collected they must remain with the sample set until the laboratory has received them 2 3 Except for trip blanks prepare all quality control samples on site in th
87. DURES CLOSURE AND POST CLOSURE ACTIVITIES PHASE I INVESTIGATION PARSON S LANDFILL PERMIT NO 0205 SR 2 AFIN 72 00171 Prepared for Arkansas Department of Environmental Quality Solid Waste Division 5301 Northshore Drive North Little Rock AR 72118 5317 Prepared by FIN Associates Ltd 3 Innwood Circle Suite 220 Little Rock AR 72211 FIN No 3013 202 April 1 2008 100 110 120 130 140 150 210 310 320 321 322 330 410 510 511 610 TABLE OF CONTENTS GENERAL 100 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR FIELD INVESTIGATIONS SAMPLE HANDLING PACKAGING AND SHIPMENT SAMPLE CONTROL AND FIELD DOCUMENTATION DECONTAMINATION OF DRILLING AND SAMPLING EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT OF INVESTIGATION DERIVED WASTES FIELD QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLES FIELD SURVEYS 200 LOCATION SURVEYS SAMPLING ENVIRONMENTAL MEDIA 300 SOIL SAMPLING GROUNDWATER SAMPLING WELL PURGING FIELD TESTING USING THE HYDROLAB MINISONDE AND DATASONDE WITH A FLOW THROUGH CELL SURFACE WATER SAMPLING DRILLING EXCAVATING SAMPLING LOGGING 400 GENERAL DRILLING OPERATIONS IN UNCONSOLIDATED MATERIALS USING A HOLLOW STEM AUGER HSA OR DIRECT PUSH TECHNOLOGY DPT WELL INSTALLATION WELL DEVELOPMENT 500 MONITORING WELL INSTALLATION WELL DEVELOPMENT HYDROGEOLOGICAL CHARACTERIZATION 600 WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR FIELD INVESTIGATIONS SOP 100 PURPOSE This Standard Operating Procedure S
88. E 03 2 0E 01 3 9E 02 _6 6E 01 Hexachloroethane 67 72 1 8270C 3 5E 01 4 1E 02 1 4E 02 2 0E 02 3 4E 02 6 6E 01 Hexachlorophene 70 30 4 8270C 10950000 10 000000 10 1 8E 01 6 1E 02 21E 02 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 Indeno 1 2 3 cd pyrene 193 39 5 8270C 465 73 6 82700 10000000 f 7 8E 00 2 3E 00 7 0E 01 9 8E 02 sd 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 PT 78 59 1 8270C 70770036 040900 10 5 1E 02 _ 6 0E 03 2 0E 03 3 0E 02 2 7E 02 6 6E 01 ol PCC 120 58 1 82700 143 50 0 82700 10 000000 Of 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 7 2E 01 i 6 6E 01 1 3 Dinitrobenzene m dinitrobenzene 99 650 82700 61E 00 20E 02 _6 8E 01 02 6 6 01 Im Nitroaniline or 3 Nitroanile 99092 82706 amp 9040900 so 3 X X AVe p 2aEo2 eeeo m amp pcrsos n wa seoce X p ofo X J Pp 9 238Eo2 esto Im Cresol 3 methylphenol 1083934 f A 3 10000 o L p X 74 lo Cresol or 2 methylphenol 9587 8270c A3 23 9056070 amp 130 amp J A9 80601 3 8 02 _ 6 6 01 p Cresol or4 methylpheno 106445 8270C 180000000 1 00000 831E 0 10 04 T 1 LL f eec 66 01 Methapyrilen
89. ENT SOP 511 1 0 PURPOSE This Standard Operating Procedure SOP describes the procedures for the development of monitoring wells subsequent to drilling and installation Procedures are performed to 1 repair damage to the formation caused by drilling activities and 2 increase the permeability of the materials surrounding the well screen Development procedures serve to remove foreign materials from the groundwater well annulus or well screen after well installation and to facilitate hydraulic communication between the formation and the well screen 2 0 SCOPE 2 1 This SOP will be used in conjunction with the site specific health and safety plan HAS to help ensure that personnel performing the work are protected from equipment related accidents and from exposure to hazardous constituents 22 This SOP is for well development by means of surging and pumping with a submersible pump and or bailer The bailing method is also used as an alternative when the formation or water producing zone fails to supply water at sufficient rates to sustain development by pumping 2 3 Use the following SOPs in conjunction with SOP 510 e SOP 120 Sample Control and Field Documentation e SOP 130 Decontamination of Drilling and Sampling Equipment e SOP 140 Management of Investigation Derived Wastes e SOP 610 Water Level Measurements 3 0 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS e Water level meter e Plastic sheet e Submersible pump or bailer e Well completion inform
90. ERGENCY PHONE NUMBERS Name Telephone Number ADEQ Contact Bryan Leamons PE 501 682 0601 FTN Associates Ltd 501 225 7779 or 479 571 3334 Associate Paul Crawford PE PG Project Hydrogeologist Dianne Lincicome PE PG Site Geologists Curtis Nunn PG and Dana Derrington Subcontractor Drilling contractor Hospitals Northwest Medical Center of Springdale AR 479 751 5711 Ambulance 911 Poison Control 1 800 222 1222 6 3 ATTACHMENT 1 Site Safety Plan Approval Sign Off Form SITE SAFETY PLAN APPROVAL SIGN OFF FORM I have read understood and agreed with the information set forth in this SSP and attachments and discussed in the Personnel Health and Safety briefing Name Signature Date Name Signature Date Name Signature Date Name Signature Date Name Signature Date Name Signature Date Project Manager Signature Date Personnel Health and Safety Briefing Conducted by Name Signature Date ATTACHMENT 2 Scope of Work Activities SCOPE OF WORK ACTIVITIES This project includes the following field activities Site reconnaissance Surface water sampling Surface soil sampling Groundwater sampling Leachate sampling Drilling and subsurface material sampling Monitoring well installation and development Installation of explosive gas monitoring probes and monitoring Sage copy es ee Survey of boring monitoring well and sampling locations and Investigation derived waste sampling and man
91. Grab samples will be collected using a hand scoop or similar sampling tool following procedures in SOP 310 Sediment samples are anticipated to be collected at approximately eight locations including one background identified as SO 1 on Figure 6 2 and two QC samples one rinsate blank and one duplicate will be collected 6 5 fi NY 22 ew WY Dy Gn SNC AC N AT i EN M AZ CD 0 D LN 4309 A WAS 1 Sn F A N ote MW SN NE S CNN XA ENS v ul A SPRING OR SEEP N RXQQQ LAKE LEVEL 03 10 08 _ SY eee Yi N TH C l eR p M Se FS i Scale in Feet A 29 ee l Figure 6 1 Proposed spring seep sampling locations l ALITA TN ESS WAIT if Up UE 7 NR AW qu RN W i N NW i TY VN qt ith hy it ut V NU M thy hy mt TUN Nant NN WS AN UN x1 SS ow qM pu AME ae NV Ae TIILCREREREIMAC ZZ M ETERNA 222222228 2200900000222 2 222220 W uil NNN M BS EEE 2 ne NS BS FSS HIN SAN ds hU hu ZEEE BAS SUA ETF NNN V MODA BEE EE EEN ZEE Se S
92. ISED August 1 2008 7 4 1 3 Field Data Collection Procedures Criteria for compliance with field data collection sections of the QAPP are as follows 1 Samples will be collected at the locations described in Section 6 0 in accordance with the appropriate SOP 2 Duplicate samples will comprise at least 1096 of the sample sets An alternate sampling station will be chosen if a sampling station description indicates a location that may be seen as inappropriate or nonrepresentative due to a local anomaly A sample will be collected from an area unaffected by the anomaly e g upstream if possible 7 4 1 4 Sample Handling Criteria for compliance with sample handling sections of the QAPP are as follows 1 Samples are shipped to the laboratory to allow adequate time for analysis within prescribed holding times 2 Samples are identified by the same site location IDs used in Section 6 0 where applicable 3 Sample integrity is maintained by ensuring that samples remain on ice at all times after collection as evidenced by temperature on arrival recorded by laboratory 4 Sample COC documents are complete Samples remain in the possession of sampling personnel laboratory personnel or commercial carriers at all times 7 4 1 5 Analytical Procedures Criteria for compliance with analytical procedures specified in the QAPP are as follows 1 Analytical methods reported in laboratory report match those specified in the QAPP and C
93. L in samples from MW 5 MW 6 MW 8 and MW 9 Elevated metals exceeding the respective MCL have been measured in samples from monitoring wells MW 1 MW 2 MW 3 MW 4 MW 5 MW 6 and MW 8 A composite sample collected by Northwest Arkansas Waste Management from leachate wells at the site in 1989 showed relatively high concentrations of several VOCs Additional groundwater data is needed because Much of the historical data for the site is of questionable quality because of a lack of QA QC documentation and undocumented sampling procedures e There have been apparent errors in some of the units used for constituent concentrations in some reports and Most sampling events have included a limited list of monitoring wells and or constituents 4 4 REVISED August 1 2008 The existing groundwater monitoring system should be assessed and groundwater monitoring should be conducted to effectively determine groundwater quality in the vicinity of landfill and to determine direction of groundwater flow Water supply wells in the vicinity of the landfill should be located and identified 4 6 Sediments There are no available data for sediments in the vicinity of the landfill to evaluate the nature and extent of contaminant migration along surface drainage pathways This data gap should be addressed 4 5 REVISED August 1 2008 5 0 PROJECT APPROACH Tasks at the site will be phased to evaluate data and refine subsequent
94. Lanyards must be made of non reactive non leachable material They may be cotton twine nylon stainless steel or may be coated with Teflon Polyethylene or PP 3 4 2 Discard cotton twine nylon and non stainless steel braided lanyards after sampling each monitoring well 3 4 3 Decontaminate stainless steel coated Teflon Polyethylene and PP lanyards between monitoring wells They do not need to be decontaminated between purging and sampling operations 4 0 Procedure 4 1 Conduct initial inspection as described in SOP 320 Groundwater Sampling 42 Record water level measurements in monitoring wells and determine total depth of well Follow procedures in SOP 610 Water Level Measurements 4 3 Calculate the total volume of water in the well using the following equation 0 04 d x h 4 of 10 Revision 1 September 2005 WELL PURGING SOP 321 Where volume in gallons d well diameter in inches h height of the water column in feet 4 4 The total volume of water in the well may also be determined with the following equation by using a casing volume per foot factor gallons per foot of water for the appropriate internal well diameter Gallons per Foot of Water x h Where volume in gallons h height of the water column in feet Approximate Gallons per Casing Internal Diameter Fotol Waler 0 75 0 02 1 0 04 1 25 0 06 2 0 16
95. MSA N WDA ILLU SRONA ARRA NN SITA WITLI ae Tad 7 NN Y S SES SOS WAN SINN hs Ze O LS AST EEC E ASSI Bou Sw uU T MANUS QS SIUS DOS SS Oh 237 Mugs ou gr 7 WTA Mh Ma d ANA SNA N ONY NNSA OA BRA La BO BS SEE Ln Uy WHEY BLY yh BA A cc VN WBE WET AW SSSR Ege A Ay YG WAN N AT e A VARKA YT May Wa Wy 2 o A 7 th A E LL de Aldana MA DRAWN BY FILE NAME APPROVED PROJECT NO PWC 3013 202 SCALE DATE i cen 6 10 08 REVISED August 1 2008 6 2 5 Groundwater Sampling During the Phase 1 investigation one round of groundwater samples will be collected at existing monitoring wells shown on Figure 6 2 that are determined to have the potential to provide representative samples using low flow purging and sampling techniques Monitoring wells will be gauged prior to purging and sampling SOP 610 Water level depths will be measured with an electronic water level meter from the surveyed reference point at the top of polyvinyl chloride PVC risers and recorded to the nearest 0 01 ft Total well depth will be measured to the nearest 0 1 ft In accordance with SOP 321 if the following conditions can be met for minimizing purge volume the intake hose or pump will be positioned at the midpoint of the screened or open hole interval The same pump will be used for both purging
96. N 1 IL a M D RN MAE ud gue ts My ig S SS N N N N i V AN WOS YEU LMM LE V MOS N EX VIP yyy Se pip xS Z7 SSS MS nE e DN PS WANG t N ie zu S SS UNY w RoR UN A ata nr d EXISTING LANDFIL PHASE 1 SS oS 2 EXISTING LANDFILL f nh ld a 2 MAL 431 C PHA lt mpm med L LI es ee E xd 2222219225 R CAD CAD_PROJ 3013 202 DWG 3013 202F G62 DWG AVON AY TIS NNASNNANNN 7 NN NNS IM M QA ANN E SSS RN s IW SS Mur SS SS NIMM i 2 N A ELS SSS NN 277 FEES SNS WE AZ SSS SSS AEN SS ip SS My Np fy EEE
97. OC 2 Samples are analyzed within the maximum allowable holding times specified in the QAPP Analytical data are internally consistent 4 The QC summary is complete with the specified number of QC samples and QC results in compliance with data quality objectives 7 22 REVISED August 1 2008 7 4 1 6 Quality Control Criteria for compliance with quality sections specified in the QAPP are as follows 1 Instrument calibrations at the beginning and end of the measurement period are within specified limits and cross check between different instruments used by separate field crews if applicable is within specified limits 2 Laboratory analyses comply with Section 7 4 1 5 Corrective action is identified implemented and validated when data sets do not meet data quality objectives 7 4 1 7 Field Equipment Calibration Criteria for compliance with field equipment calibration requirements specified in the QAPP are as follows 1 Calibration records are documented for instruments requiring calibration 25 Calibration method for each instrument is followed and calibration information documented Back up meters are calibrated along with primary meters 4 Calibrations requiring the use of standards include documentation of lot number of standard used 7 4 1 8 Data Processing Criteria for compliance with data processing requirements specified in the QAPP are as follows 1 Data and observations that are entered into
98. OP states the responsibilities and describes the instructions regarding activities conducted before during and after field investigations SCOPE 2 1 2 2 2 3 This SOP shall be used in conjunction with the site specific health and safety plan HASP to help ensure that personnel performing the work are protected from equipment related accidents and from exposure to hazardous constituents This SOP contains general details about procedures and equipment which apply to most types of environmental investigations and will be reviewed prior to commencing field activities These general instructions are intended to supplement the information contained in subsequent SOPs and clarify the role of field personnel during most types of environmental investigations A work plan and or sampling and analysis plan shall be prepared approved and implemented for each investigation EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS The responsible Project Manager shall ensure field team members use the equipment listed in the appropriate SOP as necessary for the type of sampling to be conducted PROCEDURE 4 1 Perform Pre mobilization Activities The responsible Field Team Leader FTL shall ensure implementation of the following 4 1 1 Determine the number of people that will be required to complete the sampling activities within the allotted time frame For safety and efficiency a field team should consist of at least two people 4 1 2 Prior to conducting fiel
99. Page 27 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 CORPORATION i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 11 LABORATORIES Revision 19 May 23 2007 Parameter Method Calcium EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 Chromium EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 Chromium Hexavalent SM3500 CrB Cobalt EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 Copper EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 Lead EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 Magnesium EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 Manganese EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 Mercury EPA 245 2 200 8 7470A 7471A 6020 Mercury EPA 1631E Molybdenum EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 Nickel EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 Potassium EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 Selenium EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 Silicon EPA 200 7 200 8 6020 Silver EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 Sodium EPA 200 7 200 8 Thallium EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 Tin EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 Vanadium EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 Zine EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 Volatiles EPA 624 8260B Base Neutral amp Acids EPA 625 8270C Cyanide Total SM 4500 CNC EPA 9010B 9014 Cyanide Amenable to Chlorination SM 4500 CN G EPA 9010B 9014 pH SM 4500 H B EPA 9040B 9045C Oil amp Grease EPA 1664A AR OG Phenolics EPA 420 1 9065 Specific Conductance EPA 120 1 9050A SM2510B Total Organic Halides SM 5320B EPA 9020B BTEX EPA 624 8260B 602 8021 Phenols EPA 625 8270C 604 8041 Pesticides EPA 608 8081A Polynuclea
100. Quality Assurance or other designated staff for review 14 4 2 6 Vials will be prepared as required in the instruction set provided with the samples After preparation to full volume the sample may be spiked digested concentrate etc as would be done for any normal sample requiring similar analysis 14 4 2 7 PE samples will not undergo multiple preps multiple runs multiple methods unless be ing used to evaluated multiple methods multiple dilutions unless this is necessary for quantitation of the data PE samples are often multi analyte and of various concentra tions and may exceed the linear range for one or more analyte of interest Sample dilu tions would be appropriate 14 4 2 8 No special reviews shall be performed by operation and QA unless this is what would be done to a normal client sample To the degree that special report forms and e mailing procedures are required by the PE supplier it is reasonable that the laboratory would ap ply special review procedures as would be done for any client requesting unusual report ing or login processes 14 4 2 9 NELAC requires that whenever a laboratory fails a study it shall determine the root cause for the failure and take any necessary corrective action If a laboratory fails two out of the three most recent studies for a given PE field of testing its performance is con sidered unacceptable under the NELAC PET standard for that field The lab shall then need to meet the requirements o
101. Rinse with analyte free water Store equipment according to the manufacturer s recommendation or wrap equipment in aluminum foil or untreated plastic bags to eliminate potential contamination 7 0 CLEANING PROTOCOL QA QC 7 1 Clean equipment prior to coming on site 7 2 Use disposable equipment bailers tubing etc where possible 7 3 Use high grade analyte free cleaning solutions 7 4 Keep equipment off the ground to prevent contamination once equipment is cleaned i e plastic sheeting metal horses for augers etc 7 5 Segregate clean and contaminated equipment 7 6 Follow SOP 150 Field Quality Control Samples to document the effectiveness of decontamination methods 3 of 4 Revision 1 September 2005 DECONTAMINATION OF DRILLING AND SAMPLING SOP 130 EQUIPMENT 8 0 REFERENCES 1 ASTM 2002 Standard Practice for Decontamination of Field Equipment Used at Nonradioactive Waste Sites D5088 ASTM West Conshohocken PA 4 of 4 Revision 1 September 2005 MANAGEMENT OF INVESTIGATION DERIVED SOP 140 WASTES IDW 1 0 PURPOSE This Standard Operating Procedure SOP describes the process for managing IDW generated during site assessment activities This process includes handling storing characterizing and disposing of IDW 2 0 SCOPE This SOP shall be used in conjunction with the site specific health and safety plan HASP to help ensure that personnel performing the work are protected from equipment
102. SI CGE lt Still 5 GROUND WATER MONITORING LOCATIONS ARE Ur 2 87 lll Ws Se A J PER ORTAM ji E T en NS uh APPROXIMATE AND BASED ON HISTORICAL MAPS OF tl PANY SEO zo CNN N 2 TOT EGE MEN x Wy WL THE SITE MW C p SR NN dE SN SENSE C TA A CHAN WN IN YE AT NaS A M 6 PROPOSED SAMPLING LOCATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE C LU dM Kr p WS MA S Sn y yy AND MAY VERY DEPENDING ON FIELD CONDITIONS w NN SOEUR uec 4 n p GN Wake eee t 7 7 UU VAP RA RES SSE ES UW AN P E Tm LE RUN WAY NS SAVER A 2 p Wu DANN A P HAALT Sy UR 2 NSS SO SSS hat we J AVS SANA OS LY yf YUE Vit Gi N ANN SSZ UU NAR NAA AA be CI MELE LIG YY l ANTANS E WS SSE GNIS a ar a em VSS gt w AE LI M LL INANE ANS SE MESS eb RY ill SS e Z AREL SE IOS SIT L A NEELS S ELE d I NAS ORAS ENR OS Sm me SS BEBE WALL AOL P M IM v zi x YS ARR AYRES SSS UWE EE Ze SLES WWW SIL ELL GY fl 2 ZIT CQO GROAN GG SESE cM MGS N FS SEEM EE G AL Q eye SN QA Wa ERE lice SPB PAR wan NS aS BANE SS SS SS Con ENS ENS S I PU ORS ARR RRR 0 TSS SSS Sv M NR 0 WW BRYN SY SYA SSO SAX S ROS LE SSH AE SES Yay NEA SES ARE SEA SEN SAN SN NN Xa AN S
103. SUREMENTS SOP 610 1 0 PURPOSE This Standard Operating Procedure SOP describes the method for determining the depth to groundwater in an open borehole cased monitor well or piezometers 2 0 SCOPE AND COMMENTS 2 1 2 2 2 3 24 2 5 Water level measurements are generally used to construct potentiometric surface maps Water level data are also used to determine groundwater flow direction hydraulic gradients and impacts due to pumping or other aquifer stresses and are used in the calculation of flow velocity This SOP shall be used in conjunction with site specific health and safety plans HASP to help ensure that personnel performing the work are protected from equipment related accidents and from exposure to hazardous constituents This SOP covers general groundwater level measurements Refer to the site specific work plan for more information on the scope of work activities equipment and frequency of measurements Water level measurements across an area should be obtained in less than a 24 hour period or within as short a period of time as possible Under some conditions all measurements must be taken within a shorter time interval or simultaneously The follow conditions require measurements to be taken within a shorter time period 1 If the saturated zone is stressed by intermittent pumping of production wells 2 If the saturated zone is affected by water levels in a nearby river impoundment or unlined ditch
104. Sample integrity will be maintained by ensuring that samples remain on ice or refrigerated at all times after collection 7 10 Date Project Name Project No Project Manager Print Parsons Phase 1 Investigation 3013 202 Paul Crawford Page of Report and Bill to Analytical Laboratory Parameters Method Number Lab Turn Around Time Paul Crawford American Interplex Corporation Laboratories FTN Associates Ltd 8600 Kanis Road 3 Innwood Circle Suite 220 Little Rock AR 72204 2322 Little Rock AR 72211 501 224 5060 Fax 501 224 5072 501 225 7779 Fax 501 225 6738 Sampler Signature s Recorded By Print SAMPLE DESCRIPTION No of 3 Sample Identification Date Time Containers 7 5 L 24 Hours L 48 Hours L Normal L Other Due J omp Laboratory Notes Container Type Preservative Matrix W Water S Soil O Other G Glass P Plastic V VOA vials H to pH2 T Sodium Thiosulfate NO None S Sulfuric acid pH2 N Nitric acid pH2 B NaOH to pH12 Z Zinc acetate ee NOS ipli ad u Relinquished By Signature Received By Laboratory Signature Date Time Sampler Remarks Laboratory Remarks E mail Copy Paul Crawford pwc ftn assoc com Figure 7 2 Example of sample log in COC form REVISED August 1 2008 Sample Custodians Sample custody in the laboratory will be supervised by the AIC Sample Custodian
105. Sampling Equipment Manage waste generated during the field effort in accordance with SOP 140 Management of Investigation Derived Wastes 4 3 Prior to leaving the site the FTL will implement the following procedures 4 3 1 Mark sampling locations or surveying points with wooden stakes pin flags survey flags or spray paint 4 3 2 Mark containers used to store investigation derived waste in accordance with SOP 140 Management of Investigation Derived Wastes 4 3 3 Restore the site as reasonable to pre sampling conditions e g repair fences tire ruts etc 4 3 4 The Project Manager shall ensure that all sampling locations are surveyed as applicable in accordance with SOP 210 Location Surveys 4 4 Upon completion of planned field activities and demobilization activities the following procedures will be implemented 4 4 1 The FTL shall follow up on the status of the IDW until this waste has been appropriately disposed if applicable 4 4 2 FTL will ensure that all equipment has been removed from the site and is decontaminated 4 4 3 The FTL shall prepare report quality logs and maintain these and all field records in the project files 3 of 3 Revision 2 July 2006 SAMPLE HANDLING PACKAGING AND SHIPMENT SOP 110 1 0 PURPOSE This Standard Operating Procedure SOP directs field team members in the preparation of environmental and waste characterization samples for shipment to the analytical laboratory If samples are known
106. Susan Bolyard a Masters level student at the University of Arkansas developed a conceptual hydrogeologic model for the site in her thesis entitled Migration of Landfill Contaminants in a Tilted Block Mantled Karst Setting in Northwestern Arkansas Bolyard 2007 As discussed in the thesis Greg Stanton of the United States Geological Survey USGS performed geophysical logging of two water wells and two of the monitoring wells Electrical resistivity transects were also conducted during the same investigation Bolyard and others 2007 concluded that Hydrogeological and geophysical data indicate a structural control bisecting the landfill that creates a hydrologic boundary and controls groundwater flow direction e Groundwater sampling results show contaminant migration along north trending flow paths and Local faulting has resulted in a hydrogeologic framework of tilted blocks with flow conduits at block surfaces that control groundwater gradient flow directions and ultimately contaminant migration Water wells in the vicinity of the landfill are completed in the Boone Formation A deep well located on Price Mountain reportedly historically served the White River Rural Water Association and provided most households in the vicinity with water A well search on the USGS website http nwis waterdata usgs gov identified two deep wells on the southwest flank of Price Mountain The wells are located near one another about 1 mile
107. according to AIC s QA QC Manual The AIC Sample Custodian will be responsible for entry of the sample into the AIC sample log in and analysis system 7 2 4 Analytical Methods Analytical methods are summarized in Table 6 1 of this Phase 1 Work Plan Laboratory analyses will adhere to methods described in Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste Physical Chemical Methods SW 846 USEPA 1986 and online updates except for TDS analyses which will follow USEPA s Methods for the Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes USEPA 600 4 79 020 and latest revisions No special turnaround time has been specified for this project It will be the responsibility of laboratory personnel to see that all measurement data meet prescribed acceptance criteria In the event a problem is discovered e g equipment malfunction exceedance of control limits prompt action will be taken to correct the problem Actions taken will be noted in laboratory logbooks The laboratory QA officer in consultation with the project s QA Manager will initiate corrective action resulting from QA audits if needed Reporting levels to be used for this project are included in Appendix C 7 2 5 Quality Control The purpose of this section is to describe the system of technical activities that measures the attributes and performance of process against defined standards to verify that the information generated meets stated requirements QC samples for the field and laboratory will inclu
108. affect these background samples e g sand versus clay Do not use samples that are collected for lithologic or vapor determinations for chemical analyses Do not collect samples for chemical analysis from auger flights or cuttings from hollow stem auger flights except for waste characterization of investigation derived wastes Obtaining a good sample for chemical analysis is the first priority therefore collect chemical samples for volatile organic compounds VOCs before logging soil cores 1 of 7 Revision 1 September 2005 SOIL SAMPLING SOP 310 3 0 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 3 1 3 2 3 9 3 4 3 5 Use sampling equipment constructed of materials that are compatible with the analytes of interest Refer to the site specific work plan for information on sample container size and construction and preservation and holding times For information on decontamination materials see SOP 130 Decontamination of Drilling and Sampling Equipment For information on documentation materials see SOP 120 Sample Control and Field Documentation Other equipment and materials may include photoionization detector PID disposable gloves stainless steel mixing dishes stainless steel sampling spoons and knives sample coolers and ice and waste containers as specified 4 0 GENERAL PROCEDURE Surface soil is generally classified as soil between the ground surface and 6 12 inches below ground surface unless otherwise indic
109. agement gt ATTACHMENT 3 Site Safety Plan Amendment Sheet SITE SAFETY PLAN AMENDMENT FORM Because of unforeseen changes in site conditions encountered at the Parsons Landfill site this amendment replaces the original Section s of the Site Safety Plan SSP Project Manager Name Print Signature Company Date I represent that I have been informed of the amendment to Section s of the original SSP for the Parsons Landfill site associated with performing work at this site I have also been briefed as to the contents of the amendment of the SSP and agree to perform my work in accordance with it Name Print Signature Company Date ATTACHMENT 4 Route to Northwest Medical Center in Springdale Arkansas ake Lake Fayetteville Park ee w 00 ATTACHMENT 5 Accident Report Form Accident Report Form Date of this report Person reporting ame of employee in accident Check for injury only 9 First aid case or 9 Disabling lost time injury Date of injury Time Place occurred Description of Accident Answer for all cases 1 What caused the accident Did employee contribute to the accident 2 Was another person involved Did that person contribute to the accident 3 Did effective equipment or furnishings or other unsafe conditions contribute to the accident 4 What persons other than the injured saw the accident Identify fully Physician s Stateme
110. amp 30 amp 60 833333 0 09000 nt Methylene chloride 75092 82608 5007 427637 0 050000 tT fma 49 305816 0 040000 8 amp _ 0 466916 0 02000 08 amp Propionitrile or Ethyl cyanide 107120 8268 amp amp amp 070000 amp 150 na 1641085271 o 030000 nk 1 1 1 2 Tetrachloroethane 630206 82608 0 432386 0 030000 na 1 1 2 2 Tetrachloroethane ___ 79345 82608 ra 0 104520 0 11000 ST na Touene f 108883 82608 t1000 00 2281249501 0 04000 amp 1 1 1 Trichloroethane 71556 X 82608 200 00 73000 00000 0 02000 022 na __ 0 199513 0 050000 022 na Trichloroethylene TCE 7906 82608 500 0 028015 0 07000 057 amp Trichlorofluoromethane 75 694 82608 1288 235294 0 055000 021 nn naa Vinyl acetate 108054 82608 412 429379 0 015000 ng 0 015000 0 04300 0 na Xyenes S 1330207 82608 t100000 20277777 0 41000 07 na Appendix C Comparison of screening levels to reporting levels Page 4 of 5 rganochlorine Pesticides Po Note 35 amp Note Concentrationsin mg Kg i Idrin 309002 808A CH alpha or Alpha BHC CH beta or Beta BHC 319857 808A 1 1 3260 32E 00 14E 00 1 0E04 _ 40E 04 2 7E 03 0 051717 0 00210
111. amples Review of each Quality Control check sample spike matrix spike and matrix spike du plicate duplicate per concentration level and per matrix for every sample batch analyzed that is one per 20 samples Review of sample documents for completeness by the analyst s at each step of the ana lytical process Review of instrument logs performance test results and analysts performance Review of the performance indicators blanks surrogate recoveries duplicate matrix spikes Q Random calculation checks Review of data with emphasis on the reasonability significant figures and analysis detection limit The emphasis will be on the data acceptability relative to the data quality indicators and the accuracy of the final data summaries All analytical problems encountered during the sample analysis will be prop erly addressed documented and resolved Non compliance and or QC failures are reported on the final report in the remark and note sections 15 11 Data Assessment Validation Process Flow Diagrams The following flow diagrams for the quality assurance quality control data validation and assessment process depicts how precision and accuracy data are created and utilized The individual steps in the data validation and assessment process are inclusive of all numerical computations formulas for ease of use by the American Interplex Corporation technical staff Page 61 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR
112. analyte s 9 R mean historical Laboratory Control Sample Recovery Page 50 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 CORPORATION R en LABORATORIES evision 19 May 23 2007 L the half width of the control range CL LCL 2 AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 15 15 6 2 Procedure provided for in Standard Methods 1030B Measurement Uncertainty 15 7 Control Charts 15 7 1 Theory of Control Charts The performance of a measurement system can best be demonstrated by the measurement of a stable and homogeneous control sample in a planned repetitive process As the data is transferred to LIMS LIMS QC Program will plot and evaluate the measurement process The laboratory is automatically alerted to any quality control failures 15 7 2 Uses of Control Charts Provide graphical representation of accuracy and precision for the analysis of each ana lyte and instant detection of erroneous data a Allow efficient observation of recovery trends for a particular analysis and provide long term mechanism for self evaluation of analytical data Provide assessment of analytical capability of the staff chemists with regard to the output of valid analytical data Allow observation of deviations from control trends 15 7 3 Types of Control Charts Percent Recovery R Q Relative Percent Difference RPD 15 7 4 Control Chart Preparation 15 7 4 1 Percent Recover
113. ance criteria 13 2 1 8 4 The linearity is verified at a frequency established by the method and or the manufac turer 13 2 1 9 Ifthe initial instrument calibration results are outside of established acceptance criteria correc tive actions must be performed and all associated samples re analyzed If reanalysis of the samples is not possible data associated with an unacceptable initial calibration instrument calibration shall be re ported with appropriate data qualifiers 13 2 1 10 If a reference method does not specify the number of calibration standards the minimum is five one of which must be at the limit to quantitation reporting limit not including blanks or a zero standard with the exception of instruments technology for which it has been established by the method ologies and procedures that a zero and a single calibration point standards are appropriate for calibra tions 13 2 2 Continuing Calibration Requirements NELAC When an initial instrument calibration is not performed on the day of analysis the validity of the initial calibration shall be verified prior to sample analyses by continuing instrument calibration verification with each analytical batch Essential elements of the continuing instrument calibration verification are 13 2 2 1 Calibration shall be verified for each compound element or other discrete chemical spe cies except for multi component analytes such as Aroclors Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons or Toxaphene
114. and analyses performed on raw data as well as internal checks used to validate data entry 7 16 REVISED August 1 2008 7 2 11 2 Data Recording After receiving QC checks described in Section 7 4 5 field data and laboratory data will be transferred to Excel spreadsheets Where possible laboratory data will be imported electronically without manual data entry 7 2 11 3 Data Validation All data entry and transcription from field laboratory bench sheets and laboratory reports will be verified Data and observations entered into spreadsheets will be traceable to original data sheets through project number date and operator ID Manual data entry will be verified by personnel not involved in data entry Initials of the persons performing data entry and verification will be included in spreadsheet documentation Data review will be performed by the FTN QA Coordinator or her designee upon receipt of the data package from the analytical laboratory and prior to release of results This review is done separately from the laboratory performing the analytical work and will consist of the following tasks 1 Compile a list of all investigative and QC samples including field blanks and trip blanks method blanks and MS MSD results 2 Review COC documents for completeness and correctness Review laboratory analytical procedures and instrument performance criteria as appropriate for sample holding time instrument performance blanks
115. and calibrate if necessary Perform a second calibration using either 4 or 10 su depending upon expected field values 4 5 Dissolved Oxygen Fill the calibration cup with tap water to just below the O ring that secures the membrane to the dissolved oxygen sensor Use a Q tip to remove moisture from the membrane surface and make sure there are no bubbles trapped below the membrane within the probe If bubbles appear below the membrane probe maintenance will have to be performed Invert the calibration cup cap and rest it on the top rim of the calibration cup Record the barometric pressure displayed on the Surveyor in mmHg in the Comments column of the ICF Allow the dissolved oxygen reading to stabilize then record the value displayed on the Surveyor under the Meter Reading column Calibrate the Hydrolab for DO Sat and input the recorded barometric pressure After calibration record the new dissolved oxygen reading in the Standard Value column of the ICF 4 2 Operation 4 2 1 Flow through cell setup Tubing that is attached to the fitting threaded into the flow through cell cap brings water pumped from the well into the flow through cell The fitting that is attached along the length of the flow through cell allows water to exit the cell and should be oriented vertically upward so that water exits the flow through cell only after the cell is completely filled with water Tubing from the exit fitting should transfer wate
116. and measures taken to correct minimize or eliminate the problem The blank contamination must not exceeds a concentration greater than 1 10 of the measured concentration of any sample in the associated sample batch nor can the blank contamination exceed the concentration present in the samples or be greater than 1 10 of the specified regulatory limit Any sam ple associated with the contaminated blank shall be reprocessed for analysis except when the sample analysis resulted in non detect If no sample volume remains for reprocessing the results shall be re ported with appropriate data qualifying codes 14 2 Duplicate Analysis Duplicate sample analysis is the analysis of the same sample twice to determine the precision of the analysis The relative percent difference between the two determinations will be calculated and com pared to method defined limit or historical data 14 3 Spike Analysis Spiked samples are samples fortified with a known amount of target analyte and then subjected to the entire analytical procedure The recovery of the method will be calculated for accuracy The acceptance criteria is based on defined method limits or past information generated A matrix spike duplicate can also be analyzed to yield duplicate or precision information about the analysis as well 14 4 Audits In order to verify that a laboratory possesses the capability to provide accurate and reliable test data in its day to day operations an audit of t
117. approval Obsolete documents are to be retrieved from distribution points and replaced with current versions Page 18 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 9 Revision 19 LABORATORIES May 23 2007 9 0 SAMPLING SAMPLE PRESERVATION AND HANDLING PROCEDURES The quality of analytical results is highly dependent upon the quality of the procedures used to collect preserve and store samples American Interplex Corporation recommends that clients follow sampling guidelines described in 40 CFR 136 USEPA SW 846 and state specific sampling guidelines if appli cable Sampling handling factors that must be taken into account to insure accurate defensible analyti cal results include the following amount of sample taken type of container used type of sample preser vation sample storage time container cleanliness proper labeling and proper Chain of Custody docu mentation The container preservation and holding time information is summarized in Table 1 AIC provides sample containers with the appropriate preservatives for our clients The sample kits typi cally consist of an ice chest with dividers specially prepared and labeled sample containers wrapped in protective material and Chain of Custody forms AIC keeps client specific shipping requirements on file and utilizes major transportation carriers to ensure that shipping requirements
118. ar get compound which constitutes significant risk and or liability to American Interplex Corporation Sus pension restriction procedures can be initiated by the Director of Quality Assurance Laboratory Director or the President 15 8 1 5 1 Prior to suspension restriction confidentiality will be respected and the problem and the required corrective action will be stated in writing and presented to the Laboratory Director Director of Quality Assurance and President 15 8 1 5 2 The Laboratory Director shall arrange for the appropriate personnel to meet with the Di rector of Quality Assurance and the President if available the day of notification This meeting shall be held to confirm that there is a problem and that suspension restriction of the method is required It may be n cessary to sub contract analysis to an outside laboratory NELAC State Regulatory Approved to insure holding times are met 15 8 1 5 3 The suspension restriction meeting will conclude with a discussion of the steps necessary to bring the method target or test fully back on line and in compliance The Director of Quality Assur ance will also initiate and supply a copy of the corrective action report that must be completed A copy of the meeting notes and agreed upon steps will be provided to Laboratory Director and President 15 8 1 5 4 After suspension restriction the lab will hold all reports to clients pending review No faxing mailing or distribution through el
119. at there are no bubbles in vial Revision 1 September 2005 GROUNDWATER SAMPLING SOP 320 4 7 Fill sample containers for other analytes and seal sample containers Follow the site specific SAP or EPA 1991 guidelines on order of sample collection as follows 1 Volatile organic compounds VOCs 2 Semi volatile organics SVOCs 3 Gas sensitive parameters e g ferric iron alkalinity cyanide 4 Samples requiring field filtration 5 Inorganic parameters e g metals 4 8 Filtered groundwater samples can only be collected with approval from ADEQ or if approved under permits orders and site assessment programs Filtered groundwater samples are required for specific parameters collected under Monitored National Attenuation sampling plans 4 9 Place labeled sample container s into a cooler with ice Follow SOP 110 Sample Handling Packaging and Shipping 4 10 Record samples in field logbook and complete chain of custody per SOP 120 Sample Control and Field Documentation 5 0 RECORDS The Field Team Leader FTL is responsible for maintaining permanent QC sample records 5 1 Sample Collection Record 5 2 Daily Log 5 3 Chain of Custody documentation 6 0 REFERENCES 6 1 EPA 1991 Handbook Ground Water Volume II Methodology USEPA Office of Research and Development Center for Environmental Research Information EPA 625 6 90 166 141 pp 6 2 Puls R W and M Barcelona 1996 Low Flow Minimal Drawdown Groundwater
120. ated in the site specific SAP The subsurface interval begins approximately 12 inches below ground surface Use the following steps for sample collection 4 1 Remove leaves grass and surface debris from the area to be sampled 4 2 Select means of reaching the appropriate sampling depth Procedures for reaching the appropriate depth are presented in subsequent sections 4 3 Select an appropriate pre cleaned sampling device and collect the sample 4 4 Transfer the sample to the appropriate sample container If contamination is derived from petroleum products it is acceptable to use a clean gloved hand to transfer the sample s to the sample containers 4 5 If VOC analysis is required pack the sample to completely fill the sample container and reduce the amount of headspace 4 6 Clean the outside of the sample container to remove excess soil 4 7 Label the sample container place on ice to preserve to 4 C and complete field notes 2 of 7 Revision 1 September 2005 SOIL SAMPLING SOP 310 5 0 SHOVELS AND DIGGERS This equipment is used for soils approximately 12 inches deep to a point when using the implement becomes impractical 5 1 Dig a hole or trench to the required depth 5 2 Follow sample collection procedures in Section 4 3 through 4 6 6 0 BACKHOE Used for soil approximately 12 inches deep to a point when using the implement becomes impractical approximately 10 ft 6 1 Dig a trench to the appropriate depth Expo
121. ategories that corrective action fall into 15 8 2 7 1 Review of LIMS data for transcription errors 15 8 2 7 2 Review of calculations 15 8 2 7 3 Review of quality indicators such as laboratory control samples matrix spike recoveries and method blank performance 15 8 2 7 4 Review of initial continuing and final calibration verification 15 8 2 7 5 Review of samples for presence of matrix interferences in the sample selected as a quality indicator 15 8 2 7 6 Review of spiking solutions for possible degradation or expiration 15 8 2 7 7 Investigation of whether instrumental operational parameters were acceptable but near failing acceptance criteria 15 8 2 7 8 Review of samples for possible carryover 15 8 2 7 9 Review of samples to determine if properly preserved 15 8 2 7 10 Review of preparation logs for possible errors and 15 8 2 7 11 Review of standards and reagents for possible errors 15 8 2 6 The EPA recommends the following guidelines for assessing acceptable data If any data is determine to be out of control one or all of the following should be followed 15 8 2 6 1 Review the method with the analyst I H 15 8 2 6 2 Re extract Re analyze the sample batch and thes new Page 56 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 15 CORPORATION Revision 19 L RI ABOR
122. ation e Personal protective equipment required in the site specific HASP e Turbidity meter e Photoionization detector if required e 55 gallon drums 1 of 3 Revision 1 September 2005 WELL DEVELOPMENT SOP 511 4 0 PROCEDURE 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 Pre operation Activities 4 1 1 Coordinate efforts for onsite staging of water that is produced during development Assemble containers for temporary water storage Clearly label containers according to SOP 140 Management of Investigation Derived Wastes 4 1 2 Decontaminate all equipment that will enter the well or come in contact with the development water before developing each well according to SOP 130 Decontamination of Drilling and Sampling Equipment 4 1 3 Assemble equipment on a plastic sheet in an area that is beyond the range of splashing development water activities 4 1 4 Cover the ground around the well with clean plastic sheeting to contain any spilled development water 4 1 1 Well development may begin as soon as practical after the well is installed but no sooner than 24 hours after grouting is completed Open the protective casing and remove the well cap if applicable Monitor air quality at the top of the casing and in the breathing zone using a PID if applicable Measure and record depth to water and the total depth of the well according to SOP 610 Water Level Measurements Insert submersible pump into the well and turn
123. ation Blank CCB is analyzed at a frequency of 10 and at the end of the analysis run A Continuing Calibration Verification CCV must be performed for each analyte at a frequency of 1096 and also at the beginning and at the end of the analysis The concentration of the CCV should be near the mid range of the calibration curve Value obtained must be within 10 of the expected level The Interference Check Sample ICS is used to verify inter element and background correction factors on the simultaneous ICP It is analyzed at the beginning and the end of each sample analysis run a mini mum of two 2 times for every eight 8 hours Results must fall within the control limits of 20 of the true value for the analytes included in the ICS If not within the control limits the analysis is Page 39 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 13 CORPORATION Revision 19 LA TORIES 23 2007 terminated the problem corrected the instrument recalibrated and the samples re analyzed If interference cannot be resolved successfully two options are available for resolution samples will be analyzed on sequential ICP at either the same or an alternate wavelength to eliminate interference or a standard addition technique may be employed 13 3 3 Gas Chromatographs GC Calibration curves for GCs must be composed of three to five standa
124. b 4 REVISED August 1 2008 No information is currently available for surface water sampling in accordance with National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System NPDES permits at the site A file review of ADEQ records should be conducted to document any records of surface water quality associated with the NPDES outfalls Stormwater outfalls need to be located and analytical data are needed to evaluate potentially hazardous constituents in the surface water migration pathway Analytical data should also be compared to APCEC Regulation No 2 surface water quality standards 4 3 Air The design of the Class 1 trenches included the installation of two gas vents in each trench to allow LFG to escape to the atmosphere Some of the gas vents are currently present at the site but many are damaged During a site reconnaissance that was performed by FTN on April 5 2007 explosive gas was measured in gas vents and or leachate wells A reconnaissance of the status of existing gas vents e g condition total depth depth to water and methane concentrations should be performed The installation of gas monitoring probes at the perimeter of the site and other select locations is also warranted to determine if explosive gas measured onsite is migrating to offsite property or structures 4 4 Geology and Soils Wyndal Goodman of Ozark Geological Services Inc submitted a hydrogeologic investigation report to ADEQ on May 28 1982 although the re
125. bility aquifers or formations and collecting filtered groundwater samples 2 of 10 Revision 1 September 2005 WELL PURGING SOP 321 The bladder pump system is composed of the pump the compressed air tubing the water discharge tubing the controller and a compressor or compressed gas supply The pump consists of a bladder and an exterior casing or pump body that surrounds the bladder and two 2 check valves These parts can be composed of various materials usually combinations of polyvinyl chloride PVC Teflon Polyethylene PP and stainless steel Other materials must be compatible with the analytes of interest If purging and sampling for organics e The pump body should be constructed of stainless steel and the valves and bladder should be Teflon or Polyethylene e The entire length of the delivery tube must be Teflon Polyethylene or PP e Any cabling should be sealed in Teflon Polyethylene or PP or be constructed of stainless steel Permanently installed pumps may have a PVC pump body as long as the pump remains in contact with the water in the well 3 3 Bailers 3 3 1 Purging Use a bailer if there is non aqueous phase liquid free product in the well or non aqueous phase liquid is suspected to be in the well Use of bailers for purging is not recommended unless no other equipment can be used or a permit or order has specifically authorized purging with a bailer because bailing 1 Introduces atmospheric oxy
126. ccompany the samples through sample storage preparation analysis and disposal The laboratory will return the original completed form to FTN as part of the analytical report The COC record will accompany the containers through all transfers in the field during transport and in the laboratory A minimum of one COC record must accompany each cooler 6 6 Non Sampling Activities 6 6 1 File Review and Data Compilation The site history described herein will be supplemented by investigating the history of onsite ponds permitted by the ADEQ Water Division and the water permit modifications to allow for wastewater sludge composting The operational trench construction history of the site will REVISED August 1 2008 also be reviewed along with Arkansas Highway and Transportation Department photos taken before during and after site operations Table 6 2 Sample containers preservation and holding times Sample Volume Analytical Parameters Container Type Preservative Cool 4 C Holding Time Water Matrix Metals 1 000 mL plastic HNOs pH lt 2 6 months Hexavalent Chromium 400 mL plastic None 24 hours Mercury 400 mL plastic HNO pH lt 2 28 days TOC 100 mL plastic H580 pH lt 2 28 days Chloride Sulfate 100 mL plastic None 28 days TDS 1 000 mL plastic None 7 days VOCs 80 mL glass pH 2
127. chloric and or 7 A high pressure hot water steam cleaner Sic ort em Revision 1 September 2005 DECONTAMINATION OF DRILLING AND SAMPLING SOP 130 EQUIPMENT 4 0 PROCEDURES FOR NONSAMPLE CONTACTING EQUIPMENT 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 This procedure applies to drilling rigs backhoes and support vehicles augers drill rods drill bits and small tools Equipment shall be cleaned prior to coming on site and between boreholes Large pieces of equipment will be decontaminated in an area specified by the facility This area must be capable of containing decontamination fluids and allow for managing investigation derived waste IDW Remove solid particles from equipment by high pressure steam cleaning or hand wash with brush using a phosphate free detergent solution Rinse equipment thoroughly with potable water Allow equipment to air dry unless it is reused immediately An optional rinse with a pesticide grade solvent may be used to remove coatings of organic contaminants followed by rinsing with a reagent grade or deionized water Unless small tools are going to be used immediately they must be wrapped in new aluminum foil or plastic to keep them clean until needed IDW will be managed as outlined in SOP 140 Management of Investigation Derived Wastes 5 0 PROCEDURES FOR SAMPLE CONTACTING EQUIPMENT 5 1 9 2 5 3 5 4 2 of 4 Sample contacting equipment should
128. ck Spring has been sampled on several occasions by ADEQ and metals exceeding USEPA Region 6 residential water Human Health Medium Specific Screening Levels HHMSSLs have been measured along with some volatile organic compounds VOCs Two other large springs within the Friendship Creek valley have been sampled The Beaver Water District sampled one in April 1989 and ADEQ sampled both in August 2005 The 1989 sampling showed the presence of methylene chloride at the spring identified as Friendship Creek Spring No 2 The 2005 samples from these springs did not show the presence of VOCs Arsenic exceeded the Region 6 residential water HHMSSL in the two Friendship Creek springs but other metals did not exceed water quality standards Several seeps have been located and sampled in the vicinity of the Parsons Landfill ADEQ 2005b GPS coordinates for five sampled seeps have previously been established by ADEQ VOCs have been detected in samples from some of the seeps with several VOCs exceeding their respective Maximum Contaminant Level MCL or Region 6 residential water HHMSSL Existing spring seep monitoring in the vicinity of the site has been inconsistent in terms of locations and parameters and quality control quality assurance QA QC for some sampling events is not well documented 4 2 Surface Water In April 1989 the Beaver Water District sampled Friendship Creek Cove and methylene chloride was reported at a level of 1 1 parts per billion pp
129. compared to MCLs or USEPA Region 6 tap water screening levels Tap water screening levels are based on ingestion of tap water and inhalation of chemicals volatilizing during residential indoor water use Chemicals that do not exceed the MCL or the tap water screening level will not receive further consideration in the risk assessment Total surface water sample results will be compared to USEPA MCLs and APCEC Regulation No 2 standards for protection of human health Dissolved surface water sample results will be compared to the APCEC Regulation No 2 water quality standards for surface waters for protection of aquatic organisms For chemicals with no Regulation No 2 standard the dissolved surface water concentration will be compared to federal ambient water quality criteria for protection of aquatic organisms or other appropriate criteria and guidelines Generally if the maximum detected concentration of a chemical does not exceed the screening value further risk evaluation is not required The seeps and springs samples will be compared to USEPA MCLs Region 6 residential HHMSSLs and APCEC Regulation No 2 standards for human health protection The chemical concentrations that do not exceed the various screening levels will not be given further risk assessment 8 1 REVISED August 1 2008 Detected concentrations of chemicals in sediment will be compared to Region 6 residential HHMSSLs as a human health protective screening and appro
130. copies of waybills or air bill forms Environmental samples are exempt from all DOT and International Air Transport Authority LATA requirements for packaging shipping papers labels and placards Ice chests should be marked Environmental Samples Commercial carriers are not required to sign off on the custody forms Inform the laboratory of the carrier name and expected arrival time Caution Do not ship samples such that they are in transit on a holiday weekend 6 0 REFERENCES 6 1 ASTM 2002 Standard Practice for Preparation of Sample Containers and for Preservation of Organic Constituents ASTM F3694 West Conshohocken PA 7 pp 3 of 3 Revision 1 September 2005 1 0 2 0 3 0 SAMPLE CONTROL AND FIELD DOCUMENTATION SOP 120 PURPOSE This Standard Operating Procedure SOP describes the process for documenting the traceability of samples collected for site assessments using sample control and field documentation Documents include container labels sample collection logs calibration records request for analysis forms chain of custody forms and daily activity logs or field notebooks SCOPE This SOP will be implemented when documenting field activities and tracking samples The Field Team Leader FTL will ensure that field team members who are engaged in the collection of samples are familiar with sample control and field documentation procedures Sample control and documentation are necessary to en
131. countered 11 1 Place a clear liner inside the metal probe rod 11 2 Select drive shoe with an opening appropriate for the site lithology screw it on the probe rod and advance the rod a full probe length 11 3 Retrieve the rod and remove the drive shoe and liner 11 4 Slice the liner to expose the soil 11 5 Trim the samples on all sides where practical 11 6 If PID screening is required refer to Section 12 0 11 7 Follow procedures described in Section 4 3 through 4 6 for sample collection 5 of 7 Revision 1 September 2005 SOIL SAMPLING SOP 310 11 8 If the total recovered sample volume is insufficient for both screening and laboratory analysis a second hole will be pushed as close as possible to the original hole and an additional sample will be taken from the same depth interval Any additional holes will be pushed within 5 feet of the original location where feasible 12 0 HEADSPACE SCREENING FOR VOCS USING A PID 12 1 12 2 123 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 12 8 12 9 Calibrate the PID instrument each day to the manufacturer s standard for instrument operation Follow procedures in the manufacturer s operations manual Two separate representative aliquots will be collected at each sampling interval One of the aliquots will be placed and sealed in a glass jar or plastic bag for headspace screening of VOCs with a PID Allow space the container is one third to one half empty for ambient air Seal and gently
132. ctly supervises all field activities and is responsible for ensuring that field activities are IFTN Field 1 Sampling Leader carried out and documented in a manner that is consistent with the procedures and quality requirements specified in the QAPP Laboratory Ensures that samples are analyzed for requested parameters provides point of contact for Project Manager analytical issues submits laboratory reports Laboratory QA Oversees laboratory QA QC program provides point of contact for QA QC issues reviews Officer QA QC results for completeness and attainment of data quality objectives Trains field personnel if necessary After the field study the FTN QA Coordinator reviews field FTN QA AER Coordinator data sheets calibration records laboratory reports and other documentation to see if quality criteria specified in the QAPP were achieved 7 5 REVISED August 1 2008 7 1 6 Project Task Description Section 6 0 of this Phase 1 Work Plan describes the tasks that will be performed Sections 8 0 and 9 0 describe the products that will be produced and Section 10 0 presents the project schedule 71 7 Quality Objectives and Criteria No data greater than 2 years old will be used for the risk assessment Data will initially be reviewed to determine if constituents of concern are present at the site Data will then be compared to the appropriate screening level as discussed in Section 8 0 The goal theref
133. ctronic printout or electronically NELAC 13 2 1 3 Sample results must be quantitated from the initial instrument calibration and may not be quan titated from any continuing instrument calibration verification unless otherwise required by regulation reference method or program NELAC 13 2 1 4 All initial instrument calibrations must be verified with a standard obtained from a second manufacturer or lot if the lot can be demonstrated from the manufacturer as prepared independently from other lots Traceability shall be to a national standard when commercially available NELAC 13 2 1 5 Criteria for the acceptance of an initial instrument calibration must be established e g correla tion coefficient or relative percent difference The criteria used must be appropriate to the calibration technique employed NELAC 13 2 1 6 The lowest calibration standard shall be the lowest concentration for which quantitative data are to be reported Any data reported below the lower limit of quantitation should be considered to an in creased quantitative uncertainty and shall be reported using defined qualifiers or flags or explained in the case narrative NELAC 13 2 1 7 The highest calibration standard shall be the highest concentration for which quantitative data are to be reported Samples shall be diluted and analyzed within the linear range of the curve If dilution is not an available option any data reported above this high standard should be
134. curately recorded Lower the sampler slowly to the appropriate sampling depth taking care not to disturb the sediments At the desired depth send the messenger weight down to trip the closure mechanism Retrieve the sampler slowly Rinse the sampling device with ample amounts of site water prior to collecting the first sample Discard rinsate away from and downstream of the sampling location Fill the individual sample bottles via the discharge tube and handle as described above 5 10 Collect samples using double check valve bailers if the data requirements do not necessitate a sample from a strictly discrete interval of the water column Bailers with an upper and lower check valve can be lowered through the water column and water will continually be displaced through the bailer until the desired depth is reached at which point the bailer is retrieved 1 5 of 6 Sampling with this type of bailer must follow the same protocols outlined in Section 5 9 above except that a messenger weight is not applicable Revision 1 September 2005 SURFACE WATER SAMPLING SOP 330 2 Although not designed specifically for this kind of sampling a bailer is acceptable when a mid depth sample is required 3 As the bailer is dropped through the water column water is displaced through the body of the bailer The degree of displacement depends upon the check valve ball movement to allow water to flow freely through the bailer body
135. d activities review applicable SOPs and associated documents 1 project work plan sampling and analysis plan quality assurance project plan and the site specific HASP One copy of each document is maintained onsite and available to all field team members 4 3 Review the project files for unusual procedures or site peculiarities including activities not covered by an SOP 4 4 Assemble any needed maps directions and site descriptions 4 1 5 Obtain utility clearance access agreements keys etc 4 6 Contact appropriate facility personnel prior to starting work at the site 1 of 3 Revision 2 July 2006 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR FIELD INVESTIGATIONS SOP 100 4 1 7 4 1 10 4 1 11 Submit an analytical request form to the laboratory and contact the laboratory before sampling begins to ensure personnel are aware of specific requirements and expected sample delivery dates Identify sample shipment carrier Avoid sample deliveries to the laboratory on weekends and holidays Obtain and test all equipment and field instruments needed for the task Inspect and repair and replace as necessary Calibrate as required by the manufacturer s instructions Assemble sample containers field decontamination equipment shipping supplies and any needed safety equipment Obtain a field logbook data collection forms indelible water proof pens clipboards cameras etc 42 Field Activities The responsible FTL shall
136. d in areas where vehicle traffic might pose a hazard to above grade completions Four guard posts minimum 3 inches in diameter are radially located around each well and placed at least 2 ft below ground surface Each post will have a minimum of 4 ft above ground surface and in cases where the well is surrounded by high vegetation will have a flagged attached for greater visibility Each post should be cemented inside of a hole that has a minimum diameter of 6 inches Guard posts are typically painted with high visibility epoxy paint Well pads are not constructed for temporary wells unless the temporary wells will be used for a period exceeding one month The Field Geologist is responsible for maintaining permanent QC sample records 5 1 Record appropriate construction completion information in the field logbook and or appropriate field log form 5 22 Complete the Daily Log which at a minimum should include e All observations made during backfilling and depth sounding in the field logbook e Lengths of casing material used and quantities of backfill material used e Anevaluation of any problems encountered and the final resolutions and e Any other information or observations that may be useful in assessing the well completion 5of 6 Revision 2 June 2007 MONITORING WELL CONSTRUCTION SOP 510 6 0 7 0 8 0 6 of 6 POST OPERATIONS ACTIVITIES Ensure that well surveying according to SOP 210 Location Surveys fo
137. d to place the materials 4 3 4 Ascertain the depth of the top of the sand with a weighted tape and verify the thickness of the sand pack Add additional sand if necessary to bring the top of the sand pack to the proper elevation and repeat the measurement 4 3 5 Under no circumstances should the sand pack extend into any aquifer other than the one to be monitored In most cases the well design can be modified to allow for a sufficient sand pack without the threat of cross flow between producing zones 4 3 6 In the event that a predominantly fine grained water bearing unit is encountered it may be desirable to construct a monitor well that uses a factory manufactured screen and filter prepack assembly Various sand pack gradations are available The prepacked screen assembly is attached to the solid well casing riser in the same manner as a conventional screen The fine grained formation materials are allowed to collapse against the repacked well screen Prepacked well screen have larger OD which must be considered when calculating backfill 4 4 Bentonite Seal Use bentonite chips pellets or crushed or granular bentonite Pellets should have a minimum purity of 90 montmorillonite clay and a minimum dry bulk density of 75 lb ft 4 4 1 Pour the bentonite directly down the annulus Pour the pellets from different points around the casing to ensure an even application A tremie pipe may be used to redistribute and level the top
138. de duplicate samples blanks matrix spikes laboratory control samples and surrogates as described below QC samples will be handled in the same manner as regular samples with respect to sample handling and COC procedures 7 12 REVISED August 1 2008 7 2 6 Field QC Procedures Duplicate Samples A field duplicate will be collected and analyzed with every sample set composed of one to ten samples A sample set is a collection of samples of the same type of media Sample sets composed of more than ten samples will have at least 10 of the set as field duplicates Duplicate samples will be collected from the same location and prepared in the same manner as the original sample The analysis of the duplicate samples will provide an indication of sample variability and error The field duplicate will also check the consistency of field sampling techniques The goal for duplicate samples is a relative percent difference RPD of less than 50 Field Blanks AIC will provide analyte free water for the aqueous matrix field blanks This water will be from the same source as that used for method and trip blanks Field blanks are prepared by pouring the analyte free water through decontaminated equipment or pumps and collecting the rinsate One rinsate blank per day per type of equipment will be collected Trip Blanks Water matrix trip blanks will be provided by the laboratory from the same source of analyte free water as that used for
139. des pre preserved sample containers use an intermediate vessel or container to collect samples following the procedure outlined below 3of6 Revision 1 September 2005 SURFACE WATER SAMPLING SOP 330 Rinse the intermediate vessel transfer with ample amounts of site water prior to collecting the first sample Discard rinsate away from or downstream of the sampling location After adequate rinsing fill the intermediate vessel with sample water as described in Section 5 6 above Minimize agitation of the sample Fill sample containers from the transfer vessel Minimize agitation during filling Do not touch the sample container with the transfer vessel Leave adequate headspace in the sample container This procedure allows for addition of preservative if required Do not use this step for volatile organics or other analytes where headspace is not allowed in the sample container Add preservatives if required securely cap container label and complete field notes Invert the container several times to ensure sufficient mixing of sample and preservatives Check preservation of the sample and adjust the pH with additional preservative if necessary 5 8 If the FTL or field team member collects samples with a peristaltic pump follow the procedure outlined below 1 2 4 of 6 Install clean peristaltic pump tubing according to manufacturer s instructions Place intake end of the tubing into the water to a depth 6 12 inc
140. dings are reviewed and acknowledged by the Laboratory Director If audit findings cast doubt on the validity of the reported data the client will immediately be verbally notified and a written notification will follow when their work is affected by the findings of an internal audit A revised report will be issued noting the affected data Audit follow up documentation is placed with the original corrective action documentation 15 8 5 2 Performance Evaluation samples which fail to meet acceptance criteria are thoroughly investigated and the likely causes for error are identified The results of these findings along with the corrective action taken are documented and reported on a Corrective and preventative Action Report along with written response provided to the appropriate regulatory agencies 15 8 6 R oles and Responsibilities 15 8 6 1 The Analyst must be able to recognize out of control conditions and immediately notify the Laboratory Manager for an action plan 15 8 6 2 The Laboratory Manager must review all analytical and Quality Control data for rea sonableness accuracy calculation errors and completeness of records In the event of an out of control analysis the Laboratory Manager will work with the analyst to solve the problem and prevent the report ing of suspect data The work in question will be stopped ensuring that all results that are suspect are repeated after the source of the error is remedied 15 8 6 3 The Laboratory
141. dous Solid Waste Unknown Other Waste management activities regulated by OSHA Hazwoper standard 1910 120 To be determined Petroleum contamination Polyaromatic hydrocarbon Pesticides Herbicides PCBs Metals Other Contaminant concentrations from the previous analytical results were very low for all of the above Drums Maximum of ____ for decontamination fluids for drill cuttings and for PPE and other disposable items Cubic yards Tons Gallons No IDW sampling planned Will base disposal decisions on analytical results from sampling As per SAP Other As per SAP Other Form SOP 140 1 IDW Checklist Revision 1 IDW Container Storage Log Page of Project Project Name Location Container Size Construction Material Container Number Boring Number Contents Date Filled First Last Location Final Moved To Disposition Form SOP 140 2 Revison 1 FTN Associates Ltd 3 Innwood Circle Suite 220 Little Rock Arkansas 72211 GENERATOR BROKER AUTHORIZATION FORM Date RE To Whom It May Concern Please be advised that FTN Associates Ltd located in Little Rock Arkansas has been appointed to work as our broker contractor for purposes of disposing and or recycling hazardous and or non hazardous waste that we may generate FTN
142. e if needed Collect soil samples as specified in the site specific SAP and SOP 310 Soil Sampling If groundwater sampling using DPT advance tubing with a screened end into the borehole below the water table and use a peristaltic pump to collect a grab sample If groundwater recharge is too slow to allow for efficient sampling temporary wells may be installed in borings following procedures in SOP 510 Monitoring Well Construction After the borehole has been completed to the desired depth and if no temporary well completions have been specified abandon the borehole as follows 4 8 1 For boreholes drilled with HSA drilling methods seal the borehole by using a Portland cement bentonite grout Grout must contain not less than 5 powdered bentonite by weight with wet grout weight not less than 95 pounds per cubic foot Admixtures which retard or accelerate the set shall not be used 4 8 2 Pump if gt 10 ft or pour grout through a pipe Revision 1 September 2005 GENERAL DRILLING OPERATIONS IN UNCONSOLIDATED SOP 410 MATERIALS USING A HOLLOW STEM AUGER HSA OR DIRECT PUSH TECHNOLOGY DPT 4 8 3 Slowly remove augers from boreholes as grout is placed to the bottom of the borehole through the augers until undiluted grout flows near to the surface in paved areas and at ground surface otherwise In formations where the borehole stays open without augers in place grout may be added after the augers have been removed
143. e 91 80 5 270 34 j 100000 iof Methyl methanesulfonate 66 27 3 8270C 1 1000000 OT 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 L Methyl parathion 298000 82700 f ESOT 51E 02 _1 7E 02 6 6E 01 6 6 01 S Methylcholanthrene 56495 100000 of J p 66601 6 6E 01 2 Methyinapthalene 915796 8270c 2 906500 10 3232 T d44Eo2 amp 66EO1 IN Nitrosodi n butylamine dT 924163 82700 6 6E 01 Appendix C Comparison of screening levels to reporting levels Page 2 of 5 HHMSSL Residential Water Detection Limit AIC Reporting Regulation 2 Acute Criteria HHMSSL Industrial Indoor Worker w o Dermal HHMSSL Industrial Outdoor Worker HHMSSL Residential HHMSSL Detection Nitrosodiethylamine 55 18 5 82700 N Nitrosodimethylamine 62 75 9 8270 66 01 3 4E 01 ae N Nitrosodiphenylamine 86 30 6 82700 18372071 0 41800 5 99E 01 12E 03 3 9E 02 6 0E 02 2 8E 02 6 6E 01 IN Nitroso di n propylamine 621647 82700 N Nitroso N methyletylamne 10595956 82700 N Nitrosopiperidine 100754 82700 N Nitrosopyrrolidine f 930552 82700 _ 20 000000 20 X A 8 2E 01 2 0E 06 4 0E 02 6 6 01 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 a 27E 00 91E0 6 6E 01 Naph
144. e addressed through documentation of laboratory procedures and analyst s technique Chronic survival data for both fathead minnow and Ceriodaphnia dubia test organisms is analyzed by calculating LC50 values for the given test period The LC50s are then plotted against his torical values to establish organism sensitivity If a value falls outside of the 9596 confidence intervals test variables including food type water composition and temperature are examined to isolate the po tential cause of increased decreased sensitivity Ceriodaphnia dubia reproduction and fathead minnow growth are evaluated using inhibition concentration 1C25 procedures This data is also plotted against historical data to evaluate sublethal sensitivity of the respective organism Outliers are addressed as in Page 52 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 15 CORPORATION Revision 19 L TORIE ABORATORIES May 23 2007 survival analysis 15 8 Preventative and Corrective Actions Program Preventative Action a pro active process to identify opportunities for improvement in laboratory quality and efficiency is accomplished by an on going assessment of laboratory performance The assessment reports employed must be broad enough in scope to detect a wide variety of potential failures in labora tory processes methods or procedures On a daily weekly and month
145. e field 2 4 Use the following SOPs in conjunction with SOP 150 e SOP 110 Sample Handling Packaging and Shipment e SOP 120 Sample Control and Field Documentation EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS Equipment required to implement this procedure is listed on the Equipment and Materials list found in applicable FTN SOPs FIELD QC SAMPLE TYPE AND PURPOSE 4 1 Field duplicates are collected to evaluate the reproducibility of the sampling technique 4 2 Equipment rinsate blanks are collected to evaluate decontamination procedures Collect these blanks using sampling equipment that has been cleaned in the field 4 3 Field blanks are collected to monitor on site sampling environment the suitability of sample preservatives and analyte free water and sample transport and storage conditions Field blanks are not required if equipment blanks are collected 4 4 blanks are collected to determine volatile organic compound VOC contamination during storage and transport 1 of 3 Revision 1 September 2005 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLES SOP 150 5 0 FIELD QC SAMPLE FREQUENCY 5 1 5 2 5 3 54 5 5 Field duplicates are collected one per day per matrix type or per 10 samples which ever is more frequent Equipment blanks and field blanks are collected one per day or 1 per 20 samples collected which ever is more frequent A trip blank accompanies each cooler containing VOC samples The method or project may require collec
146. e laboratory control number to each sample received generates a data management file and a hard copy printout and prints associated sample labels Every file contains the name of the client reporting and billing addresses project references purchase order numbers if pro vided current proposals special instructions date of sample receipt date sampled if provided analyti cal requirements Chain of Custody documentation and when applicable the proposed date of comple tion Verification of sample identification on containers with that of Chain of Custody documentation is con ducted by the Sample Custodian Further review by management ensures that the appropriate methodol ogy has been initiated all the information is correct and the Chain of Custody documentation has been completed After review all documentation is forwarded to the word processing center to await final compilation and reporting As samples are logged in each laboratory is notified immediately of holding times expedited analyses and special handling instructions An integrated electronic mail system is also used to allow communication between personnel concerning samples and analyses LIMS routes analyses to each specific laboratory and generates departmental work lists from which samples can be batched The analyst designates Quality Control samples within batches which are given unique sample numbers Both the samples and the Quality Control can be tracked through th
147. e method requirements the analysis is terminated the problem corrected the instru ment recalibrated and the samples re analyzed Page 41 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 INTERPLEX Section 14 CORPORATION R LABORATORIES evision 19 May 23 2007 14 0 INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL QUALITY CONTROL CHECKS Assurance of quality analytical results is achieved by applying the following techniques to all analytical methods which lend themselves to this consideration American Interplex Corporation prepares a Method Blank a Laboratory Control Sample LCS Matrix Spike MS Matrix Spike duplicate and or a sample duplicate or Laboratory Contro Sample Duplicate for each preparation run of up to 20 samples of similar matrix for parameters which lend themselves to these tests 14 1 Blank Analysis Blanks are to be included in analytical methods A blank is characterized as a sample included in the analytical process which has the same properties of the actual sample except that it does not contain the substance of interest It could be necessary to create a blank which replicates the samples in terms of salt content or any other variable Blanks will be subjected to reagent additions and other treatments that the samples receive during analysis The results of the blank are used to assess the batch The source of blank contamination must be investigated
148. e the type of survey to be performed and gather information that will assist survey personnel in location identification e g a map marking sampling locations 4 2 Survey coordinates horizontal shall be measured to an accuracy of 1 foot in reference to the State Plane Coordinate System facility coordinate system or assumed coordinate system 4 3 All elevation data i e ground surface and reference point elevations such as top of casing will be measured to the nearest 0 01 foot 4 4 X For monitoring wells or piezometers the top of casing north side will be identified with a mark e g v notch hole and this mark will be measured to the nearest 0 01foot relative to site datum the National Geodetic Vertical Datum of 1929 or the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 4 5 At least one control point will be established to meet any future survey requirements Revision 1 September 2005 LOCATION SURVEYING SOP 210 4 6 Survey personnel shall document the survey by maintaining handwritten field notebooks and recording at a minimum the names of control points used intermediate traverse points the sequence of measurements made and brief descriptors of the points measured 4 7 Survey personnel shall prepare a plot of the points located by the survey and identify each location point with a surveyor s point label 2 of 2 Revision 1 September 2005 SOIL SAMPLING SOP 310 1 0 PURPOSE This Standard Operating Procedure
149. e tracked and reported to management on monthly basis whether or not the Laboratory Director has been directly involved with the issue 15 8 1 5 8 The re occurrence of the same category of problem initiates a preventative action evalua tion or Root Cause Analysis Root cause analysis is a tool to help identify not only what and how an even occurred but why it happened Only when we are able to determine why an event or failure oc curred can specific workable corrective measures be employed to prevent future events In general root causes are underlying causes reasonably identifiable that management has control to fix and those for which effective recommendations for preventing reoccurrences can be generated The use of a common statistical tool the Cause and Effect Diagram Fishbone Diagram will be utilized in root cause determination by laboratory management and personnel 15 8 2 LIMs Laboratory Corrective Action Reports LIMs is used for determining and reporting an analysis non conformance report where data does not meet quality control limits and site historical criteria LIMs automated control charting statistically evaluates the data and notifies the laboratory Laboratory Director and Director of Quality Assurance that control limits were exceeded An entire batch of samples may require corrective action if quality control criteria are not met LIMs flags the outliers If these are judged to need corrective action the samples wi
150. e various stages from preparation to completion A query can determine what stage the analysis is in which QC belongs with which samples and the date and time analysis was initiated Data is entered into LIMS by electronic transfer when instrument interface capabilities exist or by man ual entry by analysts The system is fully GALP compliant as LIMS tracks who entered the data what changes the data went through who edited the data the times of all changes and reasons the changes took place As data is entered the analyst identifies any sample non compliance and or QC failures that apply to the reported results by adding the appropriate comment to the sample specific notes or to the remarks section of the report To standardize the case narrative section of the report the analyst cant se lect or modify one or more of the pre programmed annotations found in LIMS As results become avail Page 68 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 16 CORPORATION Revision 19 LABORATORIES May 23 2007 able information can be accessed by laboratory management When all analyses have been completed for a control number a list of completed jobs will automatically be printed by LIMS for final reporting The final report and invoice is generated reviewed and author ized by the laboratory director s and forwarded to office personn
151. ead 15 Mercury 15 Nickel 15 Selenium 15 Silver 10 Thallium 10 Tin 10 Vanadium 10 Zinc 15 Cyanide 10 Sulfide 10 Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen SM4500NHXE 0 5 Total Phosphorus USEPAG0I0B 0 5 pH USEPAS058C 0 5 Nitrate NitriteasN USEPA906 0 k 5 Ammonia as N SM4500NH BE 0 k 5 Potassium USEPA 6010B 6020 0 5 Calcium n a Magnesium USEPA 6010B 6020 n a Organic Parameters Appendix 2 VOCs USEPA 5030B 8260B 0 Appendix 2 SVOCs sasos O a 10 Appendix 2 Herbicides USEPA3535 8151A 4 10 Appendix 2 Pesticides __ USEPA3510C 8081A 4 10 PCBs Usea SIC 8082 10 Isobutyl Alcohol USEPA 8015B 10 Notes Soil sample metals preparation by USEPA 3051 REVISED August 1 2008 6 1 2 Springs and Seeps Spring and seep water samples will be analyzed for Regulation No 22 Appendix 2 constituents and iron manganese TDS sulfate chloride total organic carbon TOC pH and specific conductivity dissolved concentrations will be measured for metals with detections from total metals analysis Calcium and magnesium will also be measured to assess hardness for comparing results to Regulation No 2 criteria 6 1 3 Surface Water Surface water samples will be analyzed for Regulation No 22 Appendix 2 constituents and iron manganese TDS sulfate chloride TOC pH and specific conductivity dissolved concentrations will be measured for metals with detections from
152. echniques 6 Locate and identify stormwater outfalls 6 6 3 Aerial Survey FTN will subcontract conducting an aerial topographic survey of the site that will be used in the assessment of current conditions and in conjunction with the design of any future remedial measures The aerial survey will be conducted by AMI Engineering Inc of Little Rock Arkansas 6 6 4 Pump Removal FTN will remove pumps from the existing monitoring wells and stage them at an appropriate location on site 6 13 REVISED August 1 2008 6 6 5 Monitoring Well Installation FTN will evaluate the need for additional groundwater monitoring wells at the site after information from the site reconnaissance and Phase sampling is evaluated To install additional monitoring wells FTN will subcontract the services of an Arkansas licensed driller for drilling and soil rock sampling Drilling well construction and well development procedures are described in SOPs 410 510 and 511 respectively Borehole soils will be continuously logged from ground surface to the bedrock surface in accordance with American Society of Testing and Materials ASTM Standard D 2488 93 and USCS Monitoring well locations will be selected to assess contaminant migration pathways in the aquifer and to assess the potential for offsite impacts to groundwater Borehole information will be used to supplement existing site data and to allow for construction of more detailed geologic cross sec
153. ecision The laboratory uses duplicate analysis of samples matrix spikes and matrix spike duplicates to assess precision and accuracy A sample duplicate and or matrix spike duplicate will be analyzed for each 20 samples for in house QC and are dependent upon the sample matrix and method of analysis The ana lytical precision Relative Difference RPD is expressed as a percentage of the difference between the results of duplicate sample analyses or two matrix spikes for a given analyte It is calculated as fol lows RPD JIMS Concentration MS Duplicate Concentration x 100 Mean of MS and MS Duplicate Concentrations MS denotes Matrix Spike 15 2 Accuracy The accuracy of measured data is evaluated by the comparison of the percent recovery of the spiked sample analysis and or Laboratory Control Samples LCS of known or established concentrations to control limits Control limits have been established for each method of analysis and sample matrix A spike analysis will be performed for a group of 20 samples and is dependent upon the sample matrix method of analysis and concentration level Recoveries will be assessed to determine method efficiency and matrix interference effects Analytical accuracy will be expressed as the Percent Recovery of an analyte parameter which has been added to the environmental samples at a known concentration before preparation and analysis The equation used to calculate Percent Recovery R is as f
154. ecorded in the Standard Value column of the ICF and the Hydrolab reading is recorded in the Meter Reading column Indicate on the ICF that the temperature sensor was not calibrated to a standard 4 3 Specific Conductance Perform an initial specific conductance air calibration by emptying all contents from the calibration cup The reading on the Surveyor should be 0 Record 0 in both the Standard Value and Meter Reading columns If the Surveyor does not display a 0 value swab the interior of the specific conductance probe taking care to remove all debris and residue from the contacts on either side of the probe interior Rinse the probe with deionized water and repeat the check If the probe again fails to produce a 0 value record the value in the Meter 3 of 5 Revision 1 September 2005 FIELD TESTING USING THE HYDROLAB MINISONDE AND SOP 322 DATASONDE WITH A FLOW THROUGH CELL Reading column and calibrate the reading to 0 Fill the calibration cup with either 447 or 1500 uS cm choosing a calibration standard solution appropriate for the expected range of field values Record the Surveyor value for the desired standard in the Meter Reading column and calibrate the Hydrolab if necessary 4 1 4 pH Check the pH probe to make sure the bulb and teflon junction are free of residue and clean if necessary Fill the calibration cup with a 7 su calibration standard and note the meter reading
155. ection and placed in a separate binder These records will be compiled by the FTN Field Sampling Leader Analytical Data Analytical data generated by the analytical laboratory will be transferred electronically imported where possible to an Excel spreadsheet and submitted to the FTN Project Manager The project number and preparer s initials will be included as part of spreadsheet documentation 7 3 Assessment and Oversight The following sections address the aspects of assessment and oversight to ensure the effectiveness of project implementation and associated QA and QC activities 7 3 1 Assessments and Response Actions The purpose of this section of the QAPP is to describe internal and external checks that ensure the following 7 19 REVISED August 1 2008 All elements of the QAPP are correctly implemented as prescribed The quality of the data generated by implementation of the QAPP is adequate Corrective actions when needed are implemented in a timely manner and their effectiveness is documented 7 3 1 1 Assessment of Project Activities No performance audits will be conducted for field or laboratory analyses The Field Sampling Leader is responsible for ensuring that all necessary data are collected at each sampling site The Field Sampling Leader is responsible for performing or directing corrective action on field related activities He will check field activities performed by FTN The purpose of th
156. ectronic means may occur It is the responsibility of the Labo ratory Director to hold all reporting Clients will NOT generally be notified at this time Analysis may proceed in some instances depending on the non conformance issue Page 54 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 15 CORPORATION Revision 19 LABORATORIES May 23 2007 15 8 1 5 5 After 72 hours the Director of Quality Assurance will determine if compliance is now met and reports can be released OR determine the plan of action to bring work into compliance and re lease work A team with all principals involved can devise a start up plan to cover all steps from client notification through compliance and release of reports 15 8 1 5 6 Problems of a procedural systematic nature generally require the involvement of the Laboratory Director Director of Quality Assurance and may include that of the President Examples might include previously reported data that has been affected by a situation requiring correction or if corrective action will negatively impact the client If previous data is affected the laboratory manage ment staff is responsible for determining the significance of the problem and notifying the customer of any event that cast significant doubt on the validity of the data This notification must be documented 15 8 1 5 7 All process and systems failures ar
157. el for the mailing process The client will receive an original report containing the result of the analyses plus comments where appropriate A hard copy will be retained in our laboratory for 10 years Each parameter reported will be referenced to a methodology batch number date and time of analysis and analyst s Retrieval of data is possible by client name or sample control number Through this sys tem of record keeping the original data and any corrections can easily be located Reasons for all changes of data are documented including the date and time stamp with the analyst s unique number following Good Automated Laboratory Practice GALP guidelines No information will be given to non client parties unless a request of release is provided by the client Confidentiality of analytical data is strictly protected Page 69 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072
158. en times the level of contamination noted in the blank then that chemical will be completely eliminated from the set of sample results i e not considered a chemical of concern Blanks containing chemicals that are not common laboratory contaminants If the blank contains detectable levels of one or more organic or inorganic chemicals that are not considered by USEPA to be common laboratory contaminants then sample results will be considered as positive only if the concentration of the chemical in the sample exceeds five times the maximum amount detected in any blank Samples containing less than five times the amount in any blank will be treated as non detects and the blank related chemical concentration will be considered the quantitation limit for the chemical in that sample If all samples contain levels of a chemical not a common laboratory contaminant that are less than five times the level of contamination noted in the blank that chemical will be completely eliminated from the set of sample results i e not considered a chemical of concern Corrective actions will be performed as needed to improve data quality and reduce uncertainty and may eliminate the need to qualify or reject data Corrective actions that may be implemented include retrieving missing information resolving technical issues by requesting clarification from the sampling team requesting reanalysis of sample s from the extract stored at the laboratory r
159. ence toxicant tests are performed monthly Test organisms are subjected to a 48 hour non renewal reference toxicant Sodium Chloride NaCl to evaluate the organ ism s sensitivity Page 47 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 j AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 14 CORPORATION a LABORATORIES Revision 19 May 23 2007 Chronic reference toxicant tests are performed monthly Two 2 stock solutions of So dium Chloride NaCl are utilized one solution is for the fathead minnows and one for test for the Ceriodaphnia dubia The reference test is performed exactly as an effluent test Termination of the Pimphales promelas Survival and Growth Test is 7 days The Cladoceran Ceriodaphnia dubia Survival and Reproduction Test terminates after 6096 of the surviving control organisms have three broods of offspring with an average of 15 neo nates per surviving female Page 48 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 15 CORPORATION Revision 19 LABORATORIES B May 23 2007 15 0 DATA ASSESSMENT AND VALIDATION Data assessment and validation incorporate a variety of techniques to evaluate the quality of the meas urement process and the data generated Parameters of major importance are precision accuracy com pleteness representativeness and comparability 15 1 Pr
160. ene 205 99 2 8270C 7 8E 00 2 3E 00 2 0E 01 Benzo ghi perylene 191 24 2 8270C 1 0 709000 107 Benzo k fluoranthene 207 08 9 8270C 1 5E 00 7 8E 01 2 3E 01 2 0E 00 Benzyl alcohol 100 51 6 8270C 10950 0000 0 629000 20 1 8E 04 1 0E 05 1 0E 05 Bis 2 chloro 1 methylethyl ether 108 60 1 8270C 10 000000 10 2 9E 00 8 1E 00 8 2E 00 Bis 2 Chloroethoxy methane 111 91 1 8270C 0 549000 10 Bis 2 chloroethyl ether or Dichloroethyl ether 111 44 4 8270C 2 0E 05 Bis 2 ethylhexyl phthalate DEHP 117 81 7 8270C 6 00 4 800000 0 499000 5 3 5E 01 4 1E 02 1 4E 02 1 8E 02 6 6E 01 4 Bromophenyl phenyl ether 101 55 3 8270C 0 604000 6 6E 01 Butyl benzyl phthalate 85 68 7 8270C 7300 000000 0 349000 2 4E 02 2 4E 02 2 4E 02 8 1E 02 6 6E 01 Chlorobenzilate 510 15 6 8270C 1 8E 00 2 1E 01 7 1E 00 6 6E 01 Appendix C Comparison of screening levels to reporting levels Page 1 of 5 HHMSSL Residential Detection Water Limit HHMSSL Industrial HHMSSL Indoor _ Industrial AIC Reporting Regulation 2 HHMSSL Worker w o Outdoor HHMSSL Detection Acute Criteria Residential Dermal Worker 2 Chloronapthalene 91 58 7 82770 051000 t0 gt f 3 4E 02 6 6E 01 Po o O 2 Chlorophenol 95 57 8 8270C 30416667 0399000 10 6 4E 01 2 4E 02 2 6E 02 2 0E 01 2 7E 02 6 6E 01 4 Chlorophenyl phenyl ether 7005 72 3 8270C 078000 A 0 amp 9 5 2E 02 6 6E 01 To f P
161. eness of the analytical effort V number of valid samples analyzed T number of samples received Corrective Action AIC will provide QA documentation according to their QA QC Manual When laboratory data sets do not meet data quality objectives Section 7 1 7 laboratory personnel will upon consultation with FTN and ADEQ Project Managers determine the need for reanalysis 7 2 7 Instrument Equipment Testing Inspection and Maintenance Field instruments that will be used during the investigation include a turbidity meter water level indicator HydroLab MiniSonde or Datasonde sensors and LANDTEC GEM 2000 7 14 REVISED August 1 2008 portable gas analyzer Proper working condition of field instruments will be verified before the field survey begins Instruments will be calibrated at the beginning of each measurement period Proper working condition will be assumed if successful calibration is accomplished Proper working condition at the end of the measurement period will be assessed by recording instrument readings in standard buffer solutions pH and standard solutions conductivity as per manufactured instructions The LANDTEC GEM 2000 portable gas analyzer is returned to the manufacturer annually for factory calibration and certification Laboratory instruments used as part of analytical testing will be inspected calibrated and maintained per AIC s QA QC Manual 7 2 8 Instrument Equipment Calibration and Frequency
162. ensure implementation of the following 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 2 4 4 2 5 4 2 6 2 of 3 Conduct a daily tailgate briefing during which the HASP is reviewed and or activities for that day are discussed with all project field participants including subcontractors Observe subcontractors to ensure that all of their activities comply with the work plan SOPs and all applicable permits and licenses and health and safety requirements If health and safety problems occur the FTL shall stop work and immediately notify the site health and safety officer or appropriate level of management Monitor and provide technical direction for the fieldwork log samples and take measurements Handle package and transport samples in accordance with SOP 110 Sample Handling Packaging and Shipment Maintain chain of custody integrity of all samples according to SOP 120 Sample Control and Field Documentation Maintain daily logbook to record information concerning equipment personnel site visitors activities weather conditions affecting the activities and deviations from procedural requirements according to SOP 120 Sample Control and Field Documentation Revision 2 July 2006 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR FIELD INVESTIGATIONS SOP 100 4 2 7 4 2 8 Supervise decontamination of equipment and personnel and record procedures used for decontamination in the logbook SOP 120 according to SOP 130 Decontamination of Drilling and
163. eptual site model based on results from previous investigations and the results of the field investigations Phases 1 and 2 that were performed the results of the screening risk assessment comparisons and recommendations for corrective remediation measures and monitoring FTN proposes to submit a report to ADEQ for review A narrative interpretation of the data will be presented in the conclusions which will be brief yet comprehensive Appendices will include necessary supporting documents including field records and laboratory data reports An Arkansas registered Professional Geologist and Professional Engineer certification page will be placed at the front of the report FTN will incorporate ADEQ s comments into the final report FTN will provide a compact disc with an electronic version portable document format pdf of the report 9 2 REVISED August 1 2008 10 0 PROJECT SCHEDULE FTN has prepared a proposed implementation schedule for the project that is shown in Table 10 1 The schedule outlines the anticipated project tasks and the time to complete each task and also includes the required project progress reports that will be submitted every 4 weeks FTN will initiate fieldwork within 2 weeks of approval of this Phase 1 Work Plan Based on previous discussions with ADEQ staff no specific time constraints have been applied to this project 10 1 Table 10 1 Proposed implementation schedule Week Number EEE a as ae pe
164. equesting additional QC review by analytical laboratory e g check for calculation or transcription errors and requesting additional sample collection for site or background characterization Corrections to laboratory reports will be made by requesting revised laboratory reports or by making handwritten corrections on the reports Handwritten corrections will include documentation of discussions with laboratory QA QC personnel A single line will be drawn through errors and will be accompanied by the initials of the person making the correction along with the reason for the correction and the date the correction was made 7 18 REVISED August 1 2008 7 2 11 4 Data Storage and Retrieval Raw field and laboratory data are kept in a project file that is controlled by the FTN Project Manager or his designee All other raw computer files and spreadsheets are kept in the project directory on FTN s internal computer network These directories are accessible by personnel assigned to work on the project Document Control All pages of field notebooks or field documents will have the project number date and page number indicated in the upper right hand corner of the page or in spaces on the sheets provided for that purpose Field Observations Field observations including instrument calibration data will be recorded in bound field notebooks Photocopies of field notebook pages will be made as soon as possible after data coll
165. er and re quires water suppliers to conform to these regulations and demonstrate compliance by testing for these contaminants 11 3 The Resource Conservation Recovery Act RCRA This act was established to manage hazardous waste This is designed to protect ground water from con tamination by hazardous waste It also provides the framework for determining if a waste is hazardous 11 4 Underground Storage Tank Closures This program established the rules regarding release detection compliance for owners operators of un derground storage tank UST systems 11 5 Biomonitoring The Federal Water Pollution Control Act Amendments of 1972 1977 and 1987 were enacted to restore and maintain the chemical physical and biological integrity of the nation s water The Declaration of Goals and Policy states It is the national goal that the discharge of toxic pollutants in toxic amounts be prohibited To achieve the goals of this legislation extensive effluent toxicity screening programs were conducted Acute toxicity and chronic toxicity short term low level adverse effects tests were devel oped to provide the most favorable cost benefit relationship possible to be used in effluent toxicity tests Page 26 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 AMERICAN INTERPLEX 11 6 Occupational Safety and Health Act Section 11 Revision 19 May 23 2007 The Occupational Safety a
166. erest The purposes of equipment cleaning include Prevent contamination of uncontaminated areas Prevent cross contamination of sampling locations Ensure collection of representative samples Ensure proper operation of field equipment and Reduce exposure hazards to personnel So eec poc peo Ed SCOPE 2 1 2 2 This SOP will be implemented when performing decontamination of drilling and sampling equipment The Field Team Leader FTL will ensure that field team members who are engaged in the collection of characterization samples are familiar with sampling equipment field decontamination objectives and procedures Subcontractors shall follow this SOP for decontaminating drilling and sampling equipment or may use their own procedures s subject to approval of the Project Manager This SOP may be modified to provide flexibility in addressing site specific situations e g radioactive sites This SOP will be used in conjunction with the site specific health and safety plan HASP to help ensure that personnel performing the decontamination are protected from equipment related accidents and from exposure to hazardous constituents EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 1 Liqui Nox Alconox or non phosphate equivalent Analyte free water Potable water Cleaning brushes and containers Pesticide grade solvent rinse isopropanol hexane methanol Note that methanol is more toxic to the environment Reagent grade acid rinse nitric or hydro
167. ey of Arkansas for 1890 v 4 Type locality Named for exposures near St Joe Searcy County Arkansas principal reference section in a quarry 2 miles northwest of St Joe NE NW Section 18 Township 16 North Range 17 West The Boone Formation is overlain by 35 to 60 ft of unconsolidated material described by Goodman 1985 as follows 1 The general sequence of the strata underlying the landfill area is described as follows a Eight inches of brown to tan silty topsoil with grass roots and other organic material b One to nine feet of red brown to tan silty clay with some borings containing cobble sized weathered chert Approximately 10 ft of reddish tan to red clayey silt or silty clay with increasing amounts of chert fragments seams 2 to 3 inches thick and layers 6 to 18 inches thick with depth The chert was highly fractured with fractures trending vertical to nearly vertical and d Approximately 15 to 30 ft of red gravelly clayey silt with dramatically less chert than above 2 Onsite soils are variable and have been classified according to the Unified Soils Classification System USCS as ML MH CH CL SC GM and GC 3 Laboratory permeability testing of onsite soils yielded coefficients of permeability between 10 and 10 cm sec although modification in the gradation was necessary to prepare some samples for compaction 3 2 REVISED August 1 2008 Soils at the site are residual so
168. f initial accreditation as described in NELAC 2003 Stan dard For initial studies the PE studies shall be at least 15 days apart from the closing date of one study to the opening date of the next study The laboratory must successfully complete two PE studies for each requested PE field of testing within the most recent three rounds attempted 14 4 3 Considering Confidential Business Information during on site audits on site auditors may come into possession of information claimed as business confidential A business confidentiality claim is de fined as claim or allegation that business information is entitled to confidential treatment for reasons of business confidentiality or a request for a determination that such information is entitled to such treatment When information is claimed as business confidential the laboratory must place on the in formation at the time it is submitted to the auditor a cover sheet stamped or typed legend or other suit able form of notice employing language such as trade secret proprietary or company confiden tial These documents may be purged of reference to client identity by the responsible laboratory offi cial at the time of removal from the laboratory However sample identifiers may not be obscured from the information 14 4 4 System Audits are comprehensive technical and systems evaluations covering each operational and support area at least once per year The systems audits are
169. ficient for calibration Standard procedure is for the absorbance values to be entered into the linear regression line and a Difference for each calibration standard is calculated The Difference must be less than 30 for stan dards at or near the detection limit or limit of linearity and less than 15 for standards at the mid range of the curve If not evaluation and recalibration is performed as necessary Absorption cells are to be kept clean and free of scratches and fingerprints and are rinsed with the solu tion to be analyzed before use Cells are matched by placing portions of a solution in both cells and tak Page 38 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 13 CORPORATION Revision 19 LABORATORIES May 23 2007 ing several readings of the absorbance 13 2 2 Spectrometers Instruments must be calibrated daily The calibration requirements and acceptance criteria for the spec trophotometers is detailed in the standard operating procedures for the methods Refer to SOP ICPMS ICP HG and TJA for specific details For Atomic Absorption AA instruments a blank and at least three standards must be used in establish ing the analytical linearity The lowest calibration standard must be no greater than 2 to 5 times the In strument Detection Limit IDL The correlation coefficient for all curve standards must be greater than or equal t
170. first aid or CPR if necessary and trained to do so Obtain paramedic services or ambulance transport to the hospital 4 Contact FTN management with the details of the incident and corrective actions and 5 Write a report of the incident within 24 hours of the occurrence and submit the report to the Project Manager Any incidents requiring medical treatment require the completion of the accident report form included as Attachment 5 FTN and subconsultants as necessary will be expected to provide the following safety equipment 1 Water coolers and coolers containing thirst quenchers 2 A portable eye wash 3 A supply of clean water 4 A first aid kit The first aid kit should contain basic first aid supplies such as bandages antiseptic and pain relievers and 2 A fire extinguisher 6 2 Hospitals Northwest Medical Center is located approximately 7 miles from the site at 609 W Maple Ave in Springdale Arkansas From the site turn left onto E Hewitt Springs Rd CR 570 and go about 0 8 mile to intersect US 412 Turn right and travel west approximately 6 2 DRAFT April 22 2008 5 5 miles to S Thompson St US 71 BR Travel north approximately 0 5 mile and turn right at W Maple Ave A map of the route to this hospital is attached to this SSP Attachment 4 6 3 Emergency Notification Should a medical emergency situation arise during the course of work the following person s will be contacted as necessary EM
171. for conventional purging If the well screen is partially submerged and the pump will be used for both purging and sampling position the pump midway between the measured water level and the bottom of the screen Bailers will only be used if specified in a permit or order if free product is present in the well or as a last contingency 6 4 1 Minimize handling the bailer as much as possible using the lanyard to move and position the bailer 6 4 2 Lower and retrieve the bailer slowly and smoothly 6 4 3 Do not lower the top of the bailer more than one foot below the top of the water table so that water is removed from the top of the water column Ensure that the length of the bailer does not exceed the length of the water column 6 4 4 Retrieve the bailer and measure and record the purge volume by one of the methods in Section 5 0 6 4 5 Continue to carefully lower and retrieve the bailer until purge completion conditions have been satisfied 6 4 6 Remove at least one well volume before collecting measurements of the field parameters Take each subsequent set of measurements after removing at least 4 well volume between measurements 7 of 10 Revision 1 September 2005 7 0 WELL PURGING SOP 321 PARAMETER STABILIZATION TECHNIQUES Begin to record stabilization measurements after pumping the minimum volume as prescribed below Every attempt must be made to match the pumping rate with the recharge rate of the well before evalua
172. for temporary decontamination pad 3 7 5 ft 1 inch or 2 inch diameter PVC screens and risers for installation of temporary well completions if applicable 3 8 Personal protective equipment 3 9 Equipment for stratigraphic logging 3 10 Field logbook 1 of 4 Revision 1 September 2005 GENERAL DRILLING OPERATIONS IN UNCONSOLIDATED SOP 410 MATERIALS USING A HOLLOW STEM AUGER HSA OR DIRECT PUSH TECHNOLOGY DPT 3 11 Photoionization Detector if applicable 3 12 Personal protective clothing and equipment 4 0 GENERAL PROCEDURES 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 2 of 4 Confirm that sampling locations are marked and that clearances from all utilities have been obtained Verify that the drilling subcontractor has the necessary tools and equipment to complete the job Conduct a safety meeting at the beginning of the work and have all site personnel sign the tailgate safety meeting form Conduct brief tailgate safety meetings at the beginning of each day Drill crews shall assemble a decontamination pad set up equipment and decontaminated drilling and sampling equipment Position the HSA or DPT rig over the sampling location If the sample location is on asphalt or concrete it may be necessary to use a hammer drill concrete corer or equivalent to drill a hole through the pavement As drilling progresses berms should be used around the borehole to prevent migration of surface contaminants into the borehol
173. from the site and the well depths are about 2 000 ft bgs No information can currently be accessed concerning the White River Rural Water Association and it is unknown whether either of these wells is active or has been plugged abandoned Two private wells have reportedly been located within 0 25 mile of the landfill as reported in Permit Modification Application for Phase III Expansion One was 3 4 REVISED August 1 2008 reportedly on site and provided water to the landfill operator s office The location and status of the onsite water well is unknown Goodman 1985 identified a drilled residential well about 200 ft south of Area 1 of the Class 1 landfill and a hand dug well just outside the southwest corner of Area 2 It is unknown whether either of these wells corresponds to the wells reported to be within 0 25 mile in the Permit Modification Application 1988 or 1989 for expansion of the Class 1 landfill 3 3 Surface Water The original design of the landfill was to route surface drainage to several onsite ponds The 1983 permit summary prepared by ADEQ for the site indicates that drainage from the site was supposed to be collected in three ponds with separate water permits During the site visit in April 2007 by FTN and ADEQ two ponds were located at the site One pond is located on the south side of the two Class 1 waste disposal areas near an existing chicken house The other pond is located on the extreme eastern portion of t
174. gen which may precipitate metals or cause other changes in the chemistry of the water in the sample e g pH 2 Agitates groundwater which may bias volatiles and semi volatile organic analyses due to volatilization 3 Agitates the water in the aquifer and re suspends fine particulate matter 4 Surges the well loosening particulate matter in the annular space around the well screen 5 May introduce dirt into the water column if the sides of the casing wall are scraped 3 3 2 Sampling Bailers may be used to routinely collect some analyte groups or under specific circumstances for other analyte groups 3 of 10 Revision 1 September 2005 WELL PURGING SOP 321 3 3 3 Construction and Type Bailers must be constructed of materials compatible with the analytes of interest Stainless steel Teflon Polyethylene and PP bailers may be used to sample all analytes 3 3 4 Use of disposable bailers is required when sampling grossly contaminated sample sources 3 3 5 Use dual check valve bailers when collecting samples 3 3 6 Use bailers with a controlled flow bottom when collecting volatile organic samples 3 3 7 Contamination prevention includes 1 Keeping the bailer wrapped foil butcher paper etc until just before use 2 Using protective gloves to handle the bailer once it is removed from its wrapping 3 Handling the bailer by the lanyard to minimize contact with the bailer surface 3 4 Lanyards 3 4 1
175. he laboratory is conducted There are several types of audits These are internal where the laboratory reviews and examines itself or external where the laboratory is audited by outside organizations such as an accrediting or regulatory agency or clients American Inter plex Corporation has actively sought certification and accreditation by organizations offering it in those Page 42 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 14 CORPORATION Revision 19 LABORATORIES May 23 2007 areas relevant to our technical expertise These external audits are usually announced inspections but sometimes are conducted without forewarning The Laboratory Director usually accompanies such audit teams through the lab The auditor receives a brief overview of company objectives activities and fa cilities Interviews with technical staff are arranged along with retrieval of any documentation pertinent to the audit Auditors typically provide an account of their findings in a close out interview with labora tory management This account is evaluated and recommendations for action in response to any cited deficiencies are addressed The findings of all audits as well as the laboratory response and any correc tive actions are documented Follow up checks are performed and the status of implementation of cor rective actions is documented for all categories of aud
176. he property and may have been used as the retention pond for the Class 4 disposal area The southern pond appears to drain to the northwest to a tributary of Friendship Creek and the eastern pond drains eastward and eventually to a tributary of Friendship Creek The study area is reportedly drained on the north by Friendship Creek and on the east and south by intermittent tributaries to Friendship Creek Friendship Creek drains to its confluence with the White River approximately 2 miles northeast of the facility This portion of the White River is part of Beaver Lake a major source of drinking water Designated uses for the White River and Beaver Lake include primary and secondary contact recreation domestic industrial and agricultural water supply and fisheries 3 4 Ecological Systems CTEH will complete ADEQ s Checklist for Ecological Assessment Sampling for the landfill As appropriate a screening level ecological risk assessment SLERA will be conducted according to United States Environmental Protection Agency USUSEPA guidance 3 5 REVISED August 1 2008 4 0 PREVIOUS INVESTIGATIONS DATA GAPS A number of investigations have been conducted at the site since 1984 Available records for the site are limited in content and incomplete FTN reviewed the information and data that were available from ADEQ files compiled the information and identified the data gaps described in this section 4 1 Springs and Seeps Bro
177. hermia include 1 Call for emergency help i e ambulance or call 911 2 Move the person to a warm dry area Don t leave the person alone Remove any wet clothing and replace with warm dry clothing or wrap the person in blankets 3 Have the person drink warm sweet drinks sugar water or sports type drinks if they are alert Avoid drinks with caffeine coffee tea or hot chocolate or alcohol Have the person move their arms and legs to create muscle heat If they are unable to do this place warm bottles or hot packs in the arm pits groin neck and head areas DO NOT rub the person s body or place them in warm water bath This may stop their heart 4 5 DRAFT April 22 2008 5 0 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT The following personal protective equipment is required while drilling and associated activities are conducted at the site Hard hat Protective eyewear Gloves and Protective steel toed boots 5 1 DRAFT April 22 2008 6 0 EMERGENCY INFORMATION 6 1 Emergency Response Before initiating field activities the Project Manager will plan emergency routes and discuss them with all personnel conducting field work for this project Minor medical problems will be treated on site An ambulance will be called for major medical emergencies These steps will be followed in case of injury 1 Stabilize the victim before movement if possible particularly in case of neck or back injuries 2 Render
178. hes below the water surface where possible and turn on the pump Pump several tubing volumes through the system to flush the tubing prior to collecting the first sample Fill individual sample bottles via the discharge tubing being careful not to remove the inlet tubing from the water Do not touch the discharge tubing to the sample container Leave adequate headspace in the sample container This procedure allows for addition of preservatives if required Do not use this step for volatile organics or other analytes where headspace is not allowed in the sample container Revision 1 September 2005 SURFACE WATER SAMPLING SOP 330 Add preservatives if required securely cap container label and complete field notes Invert the container several times to ensure sufficient mixing of sample and preservatives 5 9 If the FTL or field team member collects samples with a depth grab sampler follow the procedure outlined below 1 Many of these samplers are constructed of plastic and rubber that preclude their use for all volatile and extractable organic sampling Some newer devices are constructed of stainless steel or are all Teflon or Teflon coated These are acceptable for all analyte groups without restriction Measure the water column to determine maximum depth and sampling depth prior to lowering the sampling device Mark the line attached to the sampler with depth increments so that the sampling depth can be ac
179. horized personnel e Sample integrity is maintained during all phases of sample handling and analysis and An accurate written record is maintained of sample handling and treatment from the time of its collection through laboratory procedures 7 2 3 2 Sample Custody Procedures Sample Log In Documents An example of the sample COC form that will be used for the project is provided on Figure 7 2 COC procedures are discussed in Section 6 5 of this Phase 1 Work Plan Delivery to the laboratory will be accomplished through FTN personnel or commercial couriers The laboratory will receive the original COC form with the samples arriving from the field crew The laboratory will send a copy of each COC form either a hard copy or an electronic scanned image to the FTN Project Manager at the same time as the analytical results are reported Sample Numbering System Prior to field activities the laboratory will label sample bottles to indicate which bottles to use for different analyses At the time of sampling field crews will mark each sample bottle with the location identification ID date and time and sampling personnel Samples with a corresponding field duplicate will be identified by using the location ID and appending 1 for the original sample and 2 for the duplicate sample Sample Integrity All sample containers will be preserved if necessary and placed on ice or in a refrigerator immediately upon collection
180. hours fill any depression in the grout caused by settlement with a grout mix similar to that previously described Grout will be allowed to cure at least 24 hours before beginning well development 4 5 5 For temporary well completions bentonite is used as an annular seal Well Pad 4 6 1 Cut riser to appropriate height depending on type of completion above grade 1 5 to 3 ft above ground surface and flush mount If above grade completion vent well by cutting a horizontal slit in the riser an inch below the bottom of the inserted well cap and install the protective steel casing with locking cap and grout it in place The slit for the vent should not exceed 1 2 inch in length on the PVC inside diameter and should be no wider than a typical handsaw cut Drill a small drain hole approximately Revision 2 June 2007 MONITORING WELL CONSTRUCTION SOP 510 5 0 4 6 2 4 6 3 4 6 4 4 6 5 RECORDS 14 inch diameter in the steel casing six inches below the level of the vent in the riser Use identification plates paint or waterproof markers to denote the monitoring well identification number on the steel protective casing or under the manhole cover Form and pour the concrete protective pad around the protective casing or manhole assembly The concrete pad should be sloped away from the casing for positive drainage Pad dimensions will not be less than 2 ft x 2ft x 0 5 ft The installation of guard posts is recommende
181. ich all sample measurements can be correlated 13 1 Standards A set of standards will be analyzed to establish calibration for each analytical method In addition a check standard shall be analyzed every 10 samples and at the end of the analysis This standard is neces sary to verify the standard curve and may serve in some cases as sufficient for calibration These values should be documented in the instrument calibration log whenever performed 13 1 1 Traceability of Standards All inorganic and organic standards utilized for instrumentation methodological calibration and prepara tion of quality control check samples shall be traceable Primary standards are obtained from a reliable certifiable source and are of the highest possible purity Standards are purchased from commercial ven dors such as Chem Service Inc Fisher Scientific Supelco etc for use in all laboratory analyses As each chemical is received it is assigned a unique Chemical Number through LIMS purchasing and re ceiving The chemical container and all associated documentation are labeled with this number In 2006 AIC s LIMS system was programmed to serves as an electronic record of usage and tracebility of chemicals The chemical number is referenced in either the laboratory logbooks LIMs and or the stan dard reagent logbooks Information concerning sources certification numbers date received and quan tity received is available by referencing the assigned chemical
182. iety to symptoms such as heat rash heat cramps heat exhaustion and heat stroke Heat rash is a skin irritation resulting from prolonged contact with wet clothing it can be prevented by allowing the skin to dry completely during rest periods and by showering at the end of the day Heat cramps result from the excessive loss of body fluids and electrolytes the symptoms are spasms in the abdomen or limbs e Heat exhaustion results from more severe dehydration symptoms include pale clammy skin profuse perspiration weakness headache and nausea Heat stroke is a life threatening condition that occurs when the body s temperature regulating system no longer functions properly systems include hot dry skin a high fever 106 F or more dizziness nausea rapid pulse and unconsciousness Brain damage and death may follow if the body temperature is not reduced 4 2 DRAFT April 22 2008 Measures to reduce heat stress include Plenty of cool liquids water and sports drinks will be provided at regular intervals to replace body fluids water and electrolytes lost due to perspiration Sufficient rest periods will be taken by personnel by alternating work and rest cycles throughout the course of the day Work and rest times are a function of the level of the protection and temperature The geologist engineer onsite will have the authority to require drillers to take mandatory rest periods Shelter will be availab
183. ification and site operations and maintenance The CAO required the facility to 1 Install leachate collection capability in each of the existing trenches 2 Prepare a report on the adequacy of the existing groundwater monitoring system Submit a permit modification application to reflect changes in final elevation and drainage modifications 4 Cover grade and vegetate portions of the site that had received waste and Provide written certification of trench construction CAO LIS 90 026 revoked the facility permit effective March 2 1990 It is unknown when the last load of waste was taken to the facility Capping and closure of the facility began in 1996 and in 1998 additional remediation of the initial cap and cover was performed by the city 2 4 REVISED August 1 2008 of Fayetteville The permit was voided by ADEQ on November 4 1998 Since that time problems associated with groundwater and surface water impacts inadequate soil cover lack of vegetative cover erosion differential settling ponding of water and methane gas generation have been noted by ADEQ ADEQ 2005 2 5 REVISED August 1 2008 3 0 ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING 3 1 Geology and Soils The facility is located within the Springfield Plateau of the Ozark Highlands physiographic province The uppermost geologic unit as mapped by Ernest Glick unpublished geologic worksheet in 1970 indicates the site is located in the outcrop of the Missi
184. ift absorbance readings baselines blank performance QC samples etc CORRECTIVE ACTION FORM Complete in LIMS prior to further analysis Problem must be reso ved before final report can be printed 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 15 CORPORATION R Ae LABORATORIES evision 19 May 23 2007 15 12 Departures from Policies and Standard Operating Procedures When requests for modification to an SOP such as a change in reporting limit addition or deletion of target analyte s etc are received the proposed deviation must be approved by the Laboratory Direc tor The Laboratory Director has the responsibility for ensuring the appropriate project requirements are in LIMS When a deviation or departure from Company policies or procedures is necessary approval from the Laboratory Director is required These departures may occur for the analysis of an analyte for which a method has not been defined and a method modification is necessary or for an atypical matrix In these situations AIC standard QC samples blank laboratory control sample sample duplicate and matrix spike should be initially employed for data validation The results of these samples will be technically evaluated on an individual bases by the Laboratory Director s and reviewed by the Director of Quality Assurance Further method development may be necessary prior to reporting of the data or if continual submission of similar samp
185. ils weathered from the Boone Formation Soils in the Class 1 disposal area are identified primarily as Captina silt loam CaC2 USDA 1969 and are described as a silt loam or silty clay loam to a depth of about 20 inches underlain by up to 3 ft of a brittle fragipan of silt loam or silty clay loam and then chert The Captina soils are strongly acidic with a low to medium shrink swell potential Soils in the Class 4 disposal area are primarily identified as Baxter cherty silt loam BaF USDA 1969 This type soil develops mainly on short steep hillsides bordering V shaped valleys The upper soils are cherty silt loam or silty clay loam that is underlain by fractured partially weathered chert The Baxter soils are also strongly acidic and have low to medium shrink swell potential A prominent structural feature in the area is a normal northeast southwest trending fault system known as the Fayetteville Fault Multiple lineaments including the Fayetteville Fault and fracture traces have been identified in the vicinity of the site from aerial photos and topographic maps One fracture trace passes between Areas 1 and 2 of the Class 1 landfill with a northwest southeast trend Goodman 1985 Steele 1989 Two electrical resistivity survey profiles across this fracture trace indicated an anomaly corresponding to the location of the fracture trace The anomaly was interpreted by Goodman 1985 to be minor fracture development along the fracture trace that was sa
186. imum Value Xn X s Critical Table Value 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 AMERICAN INTERPLEX CORPORATION LABORATORIES Section 15 Revision 19 May 23 2007 DATA ASSESSMENT AND VALADATION continued ESTABLISH CONTROL LIMITS Calcutate Control Limits UPPER CONTROL LIMIT UCL X 3s Method Defined Limits INVESTIGATION CORRECTIVE ACTION UPPER WARNING LIMIT UWL X 2s GRAPH DATA POINTS Review Data points LOWER WARNING LIMIT LWL X 2s LOWER CONTROL LIMIT X 3s Is Dala Within Control Limits NO RESOLVE Document Approva 2 CONSECUTIVE BATCHES Review Data points in warning limits for trends DOCUMENTATION 9 BATCHES above or below average RE ANALYZE SAMPLE BATCH identify samples by piacing an after the Control Numper 7 CONSECUTIVE BATCHES in an upward or downward direction Goto Quality Assurance Quality Control NO Page 63 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com PROCESS MATRIX EFFECTS BLANKS Contamination CALCULATIONS Review for errors BLUNDERS Pipetting dilutions weighing wrong sample wrong concentrations sloppy technique etc STANDARDS REAGENTS Verify expiration date preparation look for deterioration compare performance with past histories etc INSTRUMENT PERFORMANCE Verify Response factor dr
187. inadvertently be used in preparation of a curve or used in re certification of standards or spiking solutions Where applicable the laboratory control sample LCS or an independent check traceable standard will be used to monitor standard degradation Results of the LCS or the check standard will be compared against the given target range values and in some instances serve to validate an expired stan dard Original containers for standards such as provided by the manufacture or vendor shall be labeled with an expiration date evaluation date Records shall be maintained on standard and reference material preparation These records shall indicate traceability to purchased stocks or neat compounds reference to the method of preparation date of preparation expiration date and analyst initials number identification In addition standards prepared as stock or working standards will be properly labeled to include name of compound mixture concentra tion solvent medium date standard reagent number 13 2 Calibration Requirements Calibration is the set of operations which establishes under specified conditions the relationship be tween values indicated by measuring the instrument and the corresponding known values of a standard The result of the calibration shall be expressed as a calibration factor in the form of a calibration curve i e linear regression or as a response factor to be utilized in the qualification and quantitation of data
188. include Pale waxy white skin color and Skin becomes hard and numb Measures to treat frostbite include Move the person to a warm dry area Don t leave the person alone Remove any wet or tight clothing that may cut off blood flow to the affected area DO NOT tub the affected area because rubbing causes damage to the skin and tissue Gently place the affected area in a warm 105 F water bath and monitor the water temperature to slowly warm the tissue Don t pour warm water directly on the affected area because it will warm the tissue too fast causing tissue damage Warming takes about 25 40 minutes After the affected area has been warmed it may become puffy and blister The affected area may have a burning feeling or numbness When normal feeling movement and skin color have returned the affected area should be dried and wrapped to keep it warm NOTE If there is a chance the affected area may get cold again do not warm the skin If the skin is warmed and then becomes cold again it will cause severe tissue damage Seek medical attention as soon as possible Hypothermia is a medical emergency and occurs when normal body temperature 98 6 F drops to or below 95 F Signs and symptoms include Qu Fatigue or drowsiness Uncontrolled shivering Cool blueish skin Slurred speech Clumsy movements and Irrational or confused behavior 4 4 DRAFT April 22 2008 Measures to treat hypot
189. ion including that already in place will be discussed Corrective action will then be initiated or modified as needed 7 3 2 Reports to Management All field data field observations and analytical data will be compiled by the FTN Field Sampling Leader or his designee and submitted to the FTN Project Manager Results of QA QC checks will be presented to the FTN Project Manager The primary communication of the field data results to ADEQ will be the data summaries that are included in the reports described in Section 9 0 of this Phase 1 Work Plan FTN s internal documentation of the data including field sheets laboratory sheets and QA QC results will be available to ADEQ upon request 7 4 Data Validation and Usability 7 4 4 Data Review Verification and Validation 7 4 1 1 Purpose Background The purpose of this section of the QAPP is to state the criteria for deciding the degree to which each data item has met its quality specifications as described in Section 7 2 This decision will be based on the investigator s estimate of the effect that each deviation from the QAPP will have on the usability of the associated data item its contribution to the quality of the reduced and analyzed data and its effect on the decision 7 4 1 2 Sampling Design The criterion for meeting the sampling design requirements of this QAPP is to collect the types of data at each location as specified in Section 6 0 of this Phase 1 Work Plan 7 21 REV
190. ion and documentation of quality data taking prece dence in the review process When system deficiencies or nonconformance situations exist corrective action procedures provide a systematic approach to assess the issues restore the laboratory s system integrity and prevent reoccur rence Corrective actions are documented Preventative Action Reports LIMs Laboratory Corrective Ac tion Reports Sample Receipt Forms Revision Summary and Corrective Action Reports 15 8 1 Corrective and Preventative Action Reports Corrective and preventative actions require management level involvement to obtain acceptable results are and implementation These reports are used to document deviations in sample handling analytical SOPs client complaints operations issues and deficiencies found during performance evaluation sam ple testing External audit deficiencies are also documented with a Corrective Preventative Action Re port 15 8 4 1 maintain consistency in format and information electronic templates forms avail able to all personnel in the laboratory for initiation of Corrective Action In addition LIMs provides for Page 53 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 15 CORPORATION R m LABORATORIES evision 19 May 23 2007 documentation of improvement and preventative action suggestions Capturing the information in elec tronic for
191. ional field manual for the collection of water quality data U S Geological Survey Techniques of Water Resources Investigations Book 9 Handbook for Water Resources Investigations 10 of 10 Revision 1 September 2005 FIELD TESTING USING THE HYDROLAB MINISONDE AND SOP 322 DATASONDE WITH A FLOW THROUGH CELL 1 0 PURPOSE This Standard Operating Procedure SOP describes procedures for measuring field water quality parameters of groundwater samples using a Hydrolab MiniSonde or Datasonde 4a in conjunction with a peristaltic or submersible pump during low flow purging and sampling Measurement procedures using a flow through cell include those for temperature specific conductance pH and dissolved oxygen that closely represent water quality conditions in the aquifer 2 0 SCOPE 2 1 This SOP shall be used in conjunction with the site specific health and safety plan HASP to help ensure that personnel performing the work are protected from equipment related accidents and from exposure to hazardous constituents 22 This SOP shall be implemented when collecting groundwater samples using a peristaltic or submersible pump in accordance with a site specific work plan or sampling and analysis plan 23 Use these SOPs in conjunction with SOP 322 e SOP 120 Sample Control and Field Documentation SOP 320 Groundwater Sampling e SOP 321 Well Purging 3 0 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 3 1 Hydrolab MiniSonde or DataSonde 4a Hydrolab The Hydro
192. ipated to be collected along with four QC samples two duplicates one rinsate blank and one trip blank 6 2 3 Surface Water Sampling FTN will collect surface water samples from onsite ponds Friendship Creek Cove and nearby ponds that are identified in the site reconnaissance Proposed locations are shown on Figure 6 2 other sample locations may be added to the sampling list following additional reconnaissance At least two sampling events will be conducted during the project to establish concentrations during normal conditions and following a storm event to investigate storm event fluctuations however Phase sampling is anticipated to include only one event Grab samples will be collected using either a transfer device or by direct grab following procedures in SOP 330 Surface water is anticipated to be collected from approximately eight locations and two QC samples one rinsate blank and one duplicate will be collected These numbers may be adjusted based on findings from the site reconnaissance 6 2 4 Sediment Sampling Sediment samples will be collected downgradient from observed seeps or leachate areas A few samples of the solids and precipitants will be taken at seeps or leachate areas Anticipated locations are shown on Figure 6 2 other sample locations may be added to the sampling list following additional reconnaissance Because these samples will not be collected from free flowing streams they will be treated as surface soils
193. is self assessment will be to verify that sampling protocols were followed field duplicates were collected analytical requirements were met data quality objectives were met and documentation of sample and field observations is correct Self assessment will involve monitoring of the status of the project and examination of the records to ensure that QAPP requirements are being fulfilled The Field Sampling Leader will conduct surveillance during each sampling day and at the end of each sampling day This surveillance will include daily verification of 9 Ses EI ON AO Gein Agreement between recorded sample location identifications and actual locations visited Complete instrument calibration records Successful instrument calibration Compliance with instrument calibration criteria Completeness of field data forms Collection of duplicate samples Sample shipment to laboratory Completed COC documents and Documentation of corrective action including follow up of corrective action and documentation of its effectiveness 7 20 REVISED August 1 2008 7 3 1 2 Reporting and Resolution of Issues Findings of practices and procedures that do not conform to the QAPP will be reported by the Field Sampling Leader to the FTN QA Coordinator These findings as well as deficiencies discovered by the FTN QA Coordinator will be reported to the FTN Project Manager as soon as they are discovered Appropriate corrective act
194. iteria for the acceptance of a continuing instrument calibration must be established e g relative percent difference If the continuing calibration verification results obtained are outside established acceptance criteria corrective action must be performed and documented If routine correc tive action procedures fail to produce a second consecutive immediate calibration verification within acceptance criteria then a new initial instrument calibration must be performed If calibration has not been verified sample analyses may not occur until the analytical system is calibration or calibration verified 13 3 Instruments Instrument calibration must meet the criteria as defined in 13 2 13 3 1 UV VIS Spectrophotometers Spectrophotometers are calibrated for each analyte prior to any sample analysis using linear regression regression equation A minimum of five 5 concentrations unless specified differently in the method will be used for quantitation A calibration blank is analyzed however linearity through zero is a statis tical assumption and can result in the reporting of results below the calibration range The calibration blank is not included in the calibration An acceptable initial calibration is a correlation coefficient greater than or equal to 0 995 In addition a check standard shall be analyzed every 10 samples and at the end of the analysis The check standard will verify the standard curve and will serve in some cases as suf
195. its and assessments This cycle continues until all issues are closed 14 4 1 Internal Audits are performed to assess the degree of adherence to established policies proce dures and standards These audits are conducted by personnel who are independent of the area being evaluated Audits can identify areas for improvement with regard to compliance with policies proce dures and standards Audits also provide a means for correction prior to system failure These audits consist of real time inspections of the analytical process comparing the daily operations to applicable SOPs and policies Formal inspection records detailing the extent of the inspection are issued and any non conformance issues are noted During an audit verification shall be sought to ensure the following 14 4 1 1 Standard Operating Procedures SOPs are followed and analysts understand them 14 4 12 Analytical practices performed in the laboratory are consistent with SOPs 14 4 13 Adequate quality control practices are applied during production 14 4 1 4 Analytical data calculations and data entry are correct 14 4 1 5 Data criteria of accuracy precision completeness representativeness and comparability is met 14 4 1 6 Instrument logs laboratory notebooks and analytical records are properly maintained 14 4 1 7 Corrective actions are addressed and an appropriate response was determined 14 4 1 8 Personnel training records performance test results and analysts perfor
196. ity Assurance Plan Excerpts i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 7 Revision 19 LABORATORIES May 23 2007 7 0 DOCUMENT CONTROL The objectives of documentation are as follows to provide a standardized written program of policies procedures and instructions to demonstrate that adequate quality assurance and quality control proce dures have been implemented to demonstrate that accountability of the data is maintained and to ensure traceability of analytical results The details of which are defined in the SOP Documentation No 0001 American Interplex Corporation maintains control over the possession and distribution of documents that directly impact the quality of data It is the responsibility of the Director of Quality Assurance to maintain the Quality Assurance Manual and Standard Operating Procedures It is the responsibility of the Laboratory Managers to ensure that document control files are created and maintained for all appli cable documents originating in their areas This includes Standard Reagent documentation laboratory bench sheets calibrations standard operating procedures and instrument maintenance Full distribution records are maintained or limited document control no record of distribution is main tained is applied depending upon the purpose of the document Those publications which document QA Manual and Standard Operating Procedures are subject to full document control with the exception of those provided to Clie
197. l casing manhole before opening the well cap 4 3 Inspect the exterior protective casing of the monitoring well for damage and document the results of the inspection if there is a problem 4 1 4 It is recommended that you place a protective covering around the wellhead Replace the covering if it becomes soiled or ripped 4 1 5 Inspect the well lock and determine whether the cap fits tightly Replace the cap if necessary Record water level measurements in monitoring wells determine total depth of well and water well volume Follow procedures in SOP 610 Water Level Measurements Purge and sample monitoring wells in order of least to the most contaminated if chemistry is known or up gradient to down gradient if unknown Purge monitoring wells by using the well volume method or low flow minimal drawdown and field parameter stabilization technique or as specified in the site specific work plan or facility groundwater monitoring plan Follow procedures in SOP 321 Well Purging If sampling for VOCs reduce pumping rate to 0 05 L min Fill each 40 ml VOA vial with groundwater taken care not to let it overflow and lose preservative Place cap with Teflon septum on each vial as filled Turn the VOA vial upside down and check for air bubbles Tap the bottom of the VOA vials to dislodge any bubbles that may have formed around the cap or sides If bubbles are present remove cap and fill VOA vial with additional sample water Reconfirm th
198. l provide data in support of assessing the need for post closure corrective action at the Parsons Landfill The objectives of the project are identified in Section 1 0 of this Phase 1 Work Plan Data quality needs are for identification of presence or absence of site contaminants determination of constituent concentrations and comparison of constituents to background values and or Region 6 residential HHMSSLs 7 4 REVISED August 1 2008 ADEQ Project Manager Bryan Leamons PE FTN Project Manager Field Sampling Leader Paul Crawford PE PG Curtis Nunn PG FTN FTN Laboratory Project QA Coordinator Risk Evaluation Manager Dianne Lincicome PE PG Project Manager John Overbey FTN Alan Nye PhD AIC CTEH QA Officer Karen White AIC Figure 7 1 Project organization Table 7 2 Key positions and areas of responsibilities Title Description of Duties Responsibilities IADEQ Project X Establishes the requirements for technical work for the project and reviews project deliverables Manager to ensure standards have been met FTN Project Supervises the assigned project personnel scientists technicians and support staff in providing Manager for their efficient utilization by directing their efforts directly or indirectly on projects Risk Evaluation Supervises the preparation of the screening risk assessment comparing site results to applicable Project Manager screening levels Dire
199. lab contains probes and related circuitry that collect in situ water quality data Probes discussed in this document include those for temperature specific conductance pH and dissolved oxygen 3 2 Hydrolab Surveyor 4 Surveyor The Surveyor is the hand held user interface connected to the Hydrolab It contains an LCD data screen and data input and menu navigation buttons 3 3 Waterproof cable The Surveyor and Hydrolab are linked via a waterproof cable that connects the serial port on the back of the Surveyor to the 6 prong connector on the end of the Hydrolab 3 4 Hydrolab calibration cup and cap The Hydrolab cup threads onto the probe end of the Hydrolab and provides protection for the enclosed probes and a container for calibration solutions The cap is normally removed to add and pour off 1 of 5 Revision 1 September 2005 FIELD TESTING USING THE HYDROLAB MINISONDE AND SOP 322 DATASONDE WITH A FLOW THROUGH CELL 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 solutions during calibration but is threaded into the end of the cup for storage and transport Calibration standards Calibration standards for pH 4 7 and 10 su and specific conductance 447 and 1500 uS cm will be used to calibrate the Hydrolab Deionized or distilled water and Q tips Between calibrations the calibration cup and probes will be rinsed with deionized or distilled water General cleaning of the hydrolab may be performed using this water and Q tips
200. le to protect personnel against heat rain and other weather conditions which can decrease physical efficiency and increase the probability of accidents Body heat measurements may be required at the beginning end and optionally during the workday If at any time a worker feels nauseated or dizzy they should immediately stop work cool off rest in shaded area and seek assistance if symptoms do not subside 4 4 Cold Exposure Cold injury frostbite and hypothermia and impaired ability to work are dangers when the temperature and or wind chill factor is low To guard against cold induced illnesses and injuries a Select proper clothing for cold wet and windy conditions Layer clothing to adjust to changing environmental temperatures Wear a hat and gloves in addition to underwear that will keep water away from the skin polypropylene Take frequent short breaks in warm dry shelters to allow the body to warm up Perform work during the warmest part of the day Avoid exhaustion or fatigue because energy is needed to keep muscles warm Use the buddy system work in pairs Drink warm sweet beverages sugar water sports type drinks Avoid drinks with caffeine coffee tea or hot chocolate or alcohol and Eat warm high calorie foods like hot pasta dishes 4 3 DRAFT April 22 2008 Frostbite usually affects the fingers hands toes feet ears and nose Signs and symptoms of frostbite
201. lectronic data logging instruments and send a current to the data logger The current is proportional to the pressure and can be converted to meaningful units by the data logger Steel tape and chalk This equipment includes a graduated steel tape with a weight attached to its end used to measure depth to water The graduations on the end of the tape are coated with chalk and the tape is lowered into the well until the lower part of the tape is submerged in water The total tape in the well is noted and the tape is withdrawn The change in color of the chalk coating indicates the position of the water surface The length of wet tape is subtracted from the total tape length to determine depth to water PROCEDURE USING ELECTRIC WATER LEVEL METER 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 Calibrate and check equipment prior to leaving for the field Review prior site data to develop an understanding of trends Itis prudent to start measuring with those wells that are least contaminated and proceed towards wells having increasing levels of contamination Make sure reference points have been adequately surveyed and marked If no reference point is found measure relative to the top of the inner casing on the north side then mark that reference point and note the location in the field logbook Upon approaching the first well unlock the well cap Note the well ID date and time of day on the Sampling Record according to SOP 120 Sample Control and Field Docu
202. led with the original well number MW 2 was reportedly plugged and abandoned but no documentation for decommissioning the other wells that were replaced is available Three additional wells were also installed in August 1989 MW 10 MW 11 and MW 12 New and replacement monitoring wells MW 8 through MW 12 range in depth from 102 ft to 140 ft bgs The invoice from the driller Dean Scantling Well Drilling for drilling the replacement wells only indicated the installation of surface casing at monitoring wells MW 8 and MW 9 not at every new or replacement well Other than the invoice there is no available information regarding installation of these wells At some point monitoring well MW 13 was installed to replace MW 6 There is no available analytical data for MW 13 Routine monitoring at the site has not been performed since 1990 Eight wells were located on site by ADEQ in July 2005 four of which were sampled MW 5 MW 7 MW 8 and MW 9 Three of the wells MW 1 MW 12 and MW 13 had submersible pumps in them at the time MW 10 could not be located but the area was thickly vegetated at the time The last documented sampling event was conducted by USGS in June 2006 sampling of two monitoring wells one spring and three seeps VOCs have been historically been measured in samples from monitoring wells MW 5 MW 6 MW 7 MW 8 MW 9 MW 10 and MW 11 Measured concentrations of VOCs have exceeded the respective Region 6 residential water HHMSSL or MC
203. les is anticipated standard operating procedures will need to be developed Where appropriate data qualifiers will be provided on the final report and method modifications will be noted Frequent departure from policy is not encouraged However if frequent departure from any policy is noted the possible need for a change in policy will be addressed by the Laboratory Director Page 64 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 16 CORPORATION LABORATORIES Revision 19 May 23 2007 Ifthe figure following those to be retained is greater than five 5 the figure is dropped and the last retained figure is raised by one 1 As an example 11 446 rounds off to 11 45 Q Ifthe figure following those to be retained is five 5 and there are no figures other than zeros beyond the five 5 the figure five 5 is dropped and the last place figure is in creased by one if it is an odd number or it is kept unchanged if it is an even number As an example 11 4350 rounds to 11 44 while 11 4250 rounds off to 11 42 16 5 Data Assembly and Reporting The Laboratory Information Management System LIMS is able to track and control the movement of samples from time of receipt through disposal Data assembly and reporting are initiated at the time of sample receipt and completed during the invoicing and mailing procedures At login LIMS assigns a uniqu
204. lity s agent in these matters 4 4 PPE and Disposable Sampling Equipment Waste 4 4 1 Excess solid and liquid waste will be removed from personal protective equipment PPE and disposable sampling equipment 4 4 2 PPE and disposable sampling equipment will be placed and sealed in 55 gallon drums Disposal alternatives will be evaluated pending analytical results for each individual site 5 0 ATTACHMENTS Attachment A Site Specific Investigation Derived Waste Plan Checklist Attachment B IDW Container Storage Log Attachment C Generator Authorization Form 3of4 Revision 1 September 2005 MANAGEMENT OF INVESTIGATION DERIVED SOP 140 WASTES IDW 6 0 REFERENCES 1 EPA 1986 Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste Physical Chemical Methods SW 846 Method 1311 and 40 CFR 261 24 Table 1 25 2004 EPA Region 6 Human Health Medium Specific Screening Levels 2004 2005 4 of 4 Revision 1 September 2005 Site Specific Investigation Derived Waste Plan Checklist Site IDW Media Expected Regulatory Status Site Location Nature of Contaminants Expected Volume of IDW Expected Compositing Strategy for Sample Collection IDW Storage Waste Disposal Soil cuttings Well development or purge water Decontamination residual soil and wastewater PPE or disposable equipment Other Hazar
205. ll be removed from the work list i e batch and placed in re do status The analyst labora tory manager and in some cases the Director of Quality Assurance are involved in the decisions for ac tions which may be inclusive of re analysis and re extraction etc 15 8 2 3Information Components of the non conformance instances will be documented using the Labo ratory Corrective Action Report generated by LIMS The following information is provided description of out of control problem dates date recognized date occurred date corrected and sample control numbers affected cause of problem known or suspected corrective action taken resolution of problem acknowledgement of the corrective action by the Analyst Laboratory Manager and the Director of Quality Assurance 15 8 2 4Tracking Components of this database consist of each corrective action briefly describing the Page 55 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 15 CORPORATION Revision 19 LABORATORIES May 23 2007 reason for the Laboratory Corrective Action Report and its status a categorizing field for sorting by type of deficiency department analysis and analyst and the ability to electronically notify all individuals assigned with tasks meeting schedules compliance schedule resolution and follow up requirements categorized as to the type of error Monthly evaluation of these ca
206. lue ice in an amount approximately equal to the volume of samples is sufficient indication that the samples are adequately cooled Water samples must not be frozen or transported with dry ice as this increases the possibility for container breakage If the FTL deems it necessary for liquid samples sufficient absorbent material can be placed in the cooler to absorb liquid in the event of a sample container breakage 2of3 Revision 1 September 2005 SAMPLE HANDLING PACKAGING AND SHIPMENT SOP 110 47 4 8 4 9 4 10 Samples should be kept in the cooler from the time samples are collected until delivery to the laboratory however samples should be refrigerated for longer periods of storage Seal the completed COC form for the appropriate cooler in a plastic bag and tape it to the top lid of the cooler according to SOP 120 Sample Control and Field Documentation Securely close the cooler with strapping tape around both ends To prevent leakage from the cooler seal cooler drain on outside with duct tape When required affix signed and dated custody seals at the front left and rear right of the cooler so that anyone opening the lid will break the COC seals 5 0 PROCEDURES FOR SAMPLE TRANSPORT 5 1 5 2 5 3 54 5 5 5 6 5 7 Samples may be hand delivered to the laboratory by the field team member or may be shipped by commercial carrier e g FedEx UPS or Velocity Prepare shipping labels and retain
207. ly basis summary reports are generated for management assessment to monitor performance and promote improvement e Operational reports are inclusive of Login Summary Reports Holding Time Status Reports Sample Status Completion Reports Proposal Logs Analysis Turnaround Time Sample Turn around Time Department Turnaround Times Client Project Updates and Laboratory Expendi tures Orders Summary reports on employees identify the analyst s turnaround time absenteeism vacation and Demonstration of Capabilities Training accomplishments These reports are utilized to en sure that AIC staffs a sufficient number of trained personnel to meet the long term and short term project analytical requirements of our clients Client request complaint along with report revision summaries serves as opportunity for im provement in performance and service e Quality Control Chart Evaluations and Trend Analysis reports are indicators of potential changes occurring in the analytical system for an analysis Managers are notified of these findings in a timely manner so that preventative maintenance instrument calibration spiking solution evalua tion and procedural changes can be reviewed and performed prior to a system failure On an on going basis management reviews the Laboratory Information Management System LIMS programming for its current capabilities efficiency of use and the laboratory s future programming requirements with the product
208. lytical parameters 4 3 IDW Disposal 4 3 1 2 of 4 Aqueous wastes having concentrations below EPA Region 6 HHMSSLs will be considered non contaminated IDW and discharged to the ground Revision 1 September 2005 MANAGEMENT OF INVESTIGATION DERIVED SOP 140 WASTES IDW 43 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 4 3 5 4 3 6 4 3 7 4 3 8 Soil IDW having concentrations below these screening levels will be discharged to the ground transported to a Class 1 landfill for disposal or otherwise handled depending on the needs of the facility Aqueous wastes having concentrations above EPA Region 6 HHMSSLs will either be discharged to the POTW collection system with permission of the POTW s Industrial Pre Treatment Coordinator or transported offsite to an appropriate disposal facility Soil IDW having concentrations above EPA Region 6 HHMSSLs but below TCLP levels will be transported to an appropriate facility for treatment or disposal Soil IDW having concentrations above TCLP levels will be transported to an appropriate hazardous waste facility for treatment or disposal If requested FTN will coordinate directly with an approved disposal facility for the transportation and disposal of IDW Signing of waste profile sheets and shipping manifest will be the responsibility of the facility unless FTN s is its authorized representative The facility must complete the Generator Authorization Form Attachment C for FTN to act as the faci
209. mance is satisfac tory and current 14 4 2 External Audits are performed when certifying agencies or clients submit samples for analysis or conduct on site inspections It is AIC policy to cooperate fully with auditors 14 4 2 1 AIC is involved in external performance audits conducted semi annually water and soil through the analysis of Performance Evaluation PE samples provided by a third party 14 4 2 2 lt is recognized that PE samples are not often representative of real world samples ei ther in their form e g vials content e g multiple target analyte hits or documentation no chain of custody and as such by their nature present the laboratory with exceptions to AIC s standard operating procedures 14 4 2 3 It is AIC s and NELAC s policy that PE samples be treated as typical samples in the normal production process where this is possible Further where PE samples present special or unique problems in the normal production process they need to be treated dif ferently as would any special or unique request submitted by any client Page 43 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 14 CORPORATION ae Revision 19 RATORIES m May 23 2007 14 4 2 4 Holding times begin when the vial is opened Full volume PTs follow normal hold time procedures and storage requirements 14 4 2 5 Login will forward PE samples to Director of
210. mat provides for consistent documentation managing categorizing and tracking of the correc tive process from initiation to completeness by the Directory of Quality Assurance and Laboratory Di rector 15 8 1 2 Information components of this form are assignment of sequential numbering date of initiation of the corrective action employee initiating corrective action description of the system defi ciency or nonconformance event laboratory manager and employees directly involved in the investiga tion resolution and implementation process sample or process affected assignment of task with time schedule for completion final resolution and description of preventative action to prevent re occurrence 15 8 1 3 Tracking components for this form are sequential log briefly describing the reason for the corrective action and its status a categorizing field for sorting by type of deficiency department analysis and analyst and the ability to electronically notify all individuals assigned with tasks meeting schedules compliance schedule resolution and follow up requirements 15 8 1 4 At a minimum the corrective action must be signed off by the Laboratory Director and Quality Assurance Director The Presidents signature may be required on a Corrective action which involves a major customer complaint or an operational issue of significant impact 15 8 1 5 Corrective action may necessitate the need to suspend restrict the use of a method or t
211. ment Type I Portland e Potable water supply e Schedule 40 PVC well casing in most circumstances pre sized well screen cap and bottom plug for each well as required typically 2 inch diameter although 4 inch is sometimes used 34 inch and 1 inch are frequently used for temporary wells e Casing centralizers if required 1 of 6 Revision 2 June 2007 MONITORING WELL CONSTRUCTION SOP 510 3 2 4 0 PROCEDURE 4 1 4 2 Bentonite pellets bentonite powder or bentonite grout Protective steel casing or manhole assembly depending on requirements Guard posts for above grade completions Locking caps and padlocks Well Construction Equipment e Drill rig and accompanying equipment augers drill rods casing samplers etc Tremie pipe Grout mixing and pumping unit Steam cleaner PPE and disposable gloves Drill the borehole 4 1 1 4 1 6 4 1 7 Advance the boring to completion depth as specified in the SAP and conduct soil sampling if required The minimum annular distance between well screen casing and the borehole wall shall be 2 inches Measure total depth of borehole relative to ground surface with a weighted tape Pre develop borehole by circulating drilling fluids water or air or by rotating augers until hole is cleaned of cuttings where practical Remove cuttings from the area around the auger and transfer to a drum Withdraw drill rods and bit auger flights If installing well casing through hollo
212. mentation or Water Level Elevation Data Sheet Attachment A Check for well damage that could indicate a shift in reference point Note and record in the field logbook any physical changes like erosion or cracks in the protective concrete pad or variation in the total depth of the well Check to determine if well is properly vented if not remove well cap and allow the well to equilibrate to atmospheric pressure Note in the field logbook that a vent hole 2of4 Revision 1 September 2005 WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS SOP 610 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 should be drilled or notched in the well casing if applicable before the next round of water level measurements is conducted If required by site specific conditions monitor the headspace of the well with a photoionization detector PID to determine the presence of volatile organic compounds and record the measurements in the field logbook Lower an electric water level meter or equivalent into the well until the water surface is encountered Measure the depth to water DTW defined as the distance from the water surface to the measuring point and record the reading Make at least two preferably three measurements at each well and average data Where not obstructed by a pump the total depth of the well should be measured and recorded to the nearest 0 1 ft Use the DTW and total depth of the monitoring well to calculate the volume of water in the well
213. meters Parameters selected for analysis are described in this section Laboratory analyses will adhere to methods described in Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste Physical Chemical Methods SW 846 USEPA 1986 and online updates except for TDS Table 6 1 identifies the estimated number of samples including QC to be collected and the proposed analytical methods to be used An ADEQ certified laboratory will provide analytical services American Interplex Corporation Laboratories AIC will provide these services 6 1 1 Surface Soil Surface soils samples collected from the wastewater sludge composting area if identified will be submitted for analysis of Kjeldahl nitrogen phosphorus pH mercury nitrates nitrites ammonia potassium and the metals arsenic cadmium copper chromium lead nickel selenium zinc and iron 6 1 Table 6 1 Summary of analytical methods REVISED August 1 2008 Includes total and an assumed dissolved analysis Includes QC samples 6 2 Phase 1 Phase 1 Estimated Number of Estimated Number of Parameter Name Analytical Method Water Samples Soil Samples Inorganic Parameters Sulfate USEPA 9056 10 TOC USEPA SOR Inaction Fumar 10 Chloride 9056 0 47 10 TDS n a Iron 15 Manganese 10 Antimony 10 Arsenic 15 Barium 10 Beryllium 10 Cadmium 15 Chromium Hexavalent 15 Chromium 15 Cobalt 10 Copper 15 L
214. mples for laboratory analysis This section includes a general description of methodologies that will be followed Appendix A contains SOPs for activities described in this sampling and analysis plan 6 2 1 Surface Soil Sampling An attempt will be made to identify the area used for wastewater sludge composting reported to be north of the Class 4 area during the site reconnaissance If identified FTN will collect up to three surface soil samples at the area Grab samples will be collected from 0 to 6 inches bgs A hand scoop or similar sampling tool will be used following procedures in SOP 310 A background sample and one QC sample duplicate will also be collected 6 2 2 Spring and Seep Sampling FTN anticipates collecting samples from the springs and seeps at the locations shown on Figure 6 1 Other sample locations may be added to the sampling list following additional reconnaissance FTN will survey the general area shown on Figure 6 2 during the site reconnaissance to locate additional seeps springs At least two sampling events will be conducted during the project to establish concentrations during normal conditions and following a storm event to investigate storm event fluctuations however Phase 1 sampling is anticipated to include only one event Grab samples will be collected using either a transfer device or by direct grab 6 4 REVISED August 1 2008 following procedures in SOP 330 Sixteen seep spring samples are antic
215. n be sampled with a peristaltic pump if the tubing and pump configurations are appropriate 3 2 2 Submersible Pumps Variable Speed Electric Submersible Pump A variable speed submersible pump can be used to purge and sample groundwater from 2 inch and larger internal diameter wells A variable speed submersible pump can be used for normal purging and sampling sampling low permeability aquifers or formations and collecting filtered groundwater samples Make sure that the pump housing fittings check valves and associated hardware are constructed of stainless steel Install a check valve at the output side of the pump to prevent back flow Make sure that any other materials are compatible with the analytes of interest If purging and sampling for organics e The entire length of the delivery tube must be Teflon Polyethylene or Polypropylene PP tubing e The electrical cord must be sealed in Teflon Polyethylene or PP and any cabling must be sealed in Teflon Polyethylene or PP or be constructed of stainless steel e All interior components that contact the sample water impeller seals gaskets etc must be constructed of stainless steel or Teflon 3 2 3 Bladder Pumps A variable speed positive displacement bladder pump no gas contact can be used to purge and sample groundwater from 3 4 inch and larger internal diameter wells A variable speed bladder pump can be used for normal purging and sampling sampling low permea
216. n initial and on going demonstration of capabilities has been demonstrated Review development and inclusion of analytical methodologies other than those listed are dependent upon updated regulatory requirements technological advancement and project specific client requested All analytical methods used for regulatory compliance must meet initial and on going demonstration of capabilities as defined in the methodology to confirm its fitness for use In the event no standard analytical methodology is available AIC may at a clients request initiate method development for the analyte of interest Initial method validation to determine reporting levels and to assess its fitness for use will be established by analysis of laboratory blanks laboratory control samples and matrix spiked samples The final report to the client will indicated the results of the quality contro samples so an assessment of its suitability for the client can be determined Page 29 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 INTERPL EX Section 12 Revision 19 LABORATORIES May 23 2007 12 0 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES The formal structure of our Quality Assurance Program is contained in a set of Standard Operating Pro cedures SOPs through which each specific topic is detailed individually American Interplex Corpora tion has structured our SOPs along the guidelines and const
217. nce J C Branner and F W Simonds 1891 Annual Report of the Geological Survey of Arkansas for 1888 v 4 pp xiii 27 37 Type locality Named for extensive development in Boone County Arkansas ST JOE LIMESTONE MEMBER of the BOONE FORMATION Age Early Mississippian Period Distribution Northern Arkansas Ozark Plateaus Oklahoma southern Missouri 3 1 REVISED August 1 2008 Geology The St Joe Limestone is a fine grained crinoidal limestone that may occasionally contain some smoothly bedded chert Some beds may display a coarse bioclastic texture The limestones and cherts are frequently gray but may also be red pink purple brown or amber The fossil clasts are generally white in contrast to the matrix Some thin calcareous shales are found in the sequence top lower middle and base The base of the St Joe Limestone is generally marked by a phosphatic greenish shale or conglomerate It is a frequent bluff former A formation rank has been suggested by some workers for the St Joe Member of the Boone Formation Crinoids brachiopods bryozoa conodonts blastoids ostracods and rugose coral have been noted in the unit The basal contact is considered disconformable in most places but some workers suggest a conformable lower contact with the Chattanooga Shale The St Joe Limestone ranges from a feather edge to over 110 feet in thickness Original Reference T C Hopkins 1893 Annual Report of the Geological Surv
218. ncluding those pertaining to calibration and test equipment certificates and re ports shall be safely stored held secure and in confidence to the client All records shall be maintained for ten years Records which are stored on electronic media must be supported by the hardware and software necessary for their retrieval a Raw data records for the Laboratory consist of parameter logbooks personal logbooks and computer generated data files In general the records throughout the laboratory are archived in the same manner When sufficient files are acquired they are transferred to a storage box the box content is noted and an archival storage number is assigned Access to archived information shall be documented by an access log Files are stored in a locked secured area Page 33 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 CORPORATION R n 9 LABORATORIES evision 1 May 23 2007 i AMERICAN INTER PLEX Section 13 13 0 CALIBRATION Inclusion of standards in analytical methods is necessary to quantitate the amount of analytes present in the sample Calibration is used to determine by measurement or comparison with a standard the correct value of each scale reading on a meter instrument or other device The levels of the applied calibration standard should bracket the range of planned or expected sample measurements It establishes a repro ducible reference point to wh
219. nd Health Act as defined in 40 CFR 1910 1000 limits employees exposure to toxic and hazardous substances in the work place NIOSH and OSHA methods for monitoring exposure provide the information needed to modify and improve control systems thus protecting the worker from occupational health hazards 11 7 Analytical Methods Listing Parameter Carbonaceous Biochemical Oxygen Demand Chemical Oxygen Demand Dissolved Oxygen Total Organic Oxygen Acidity as CaCO3 Total Coliform Fecal Coliform Acute Toxicity Chronic Toxicity Biochemical Oxygen Demand Carbonaceous Alkalinity as CaCO3 Chloride Fluoride Hardness as CaCO3 Nitrate Nitrite Nitrate Nitrite Sulfate Sulfide Sulfite Ammonia Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen Orthophosphate Phosphorus Aluminum Antimony Arsenic Barium Beryllium Boron Cadmium Method SM 5210B HACH 8000 SM 4500 0 C SM 5310 B C EPA9060 SM 2310B SM 9221B 9221C SM 9221CE SM 9222D EPA 2000 2002 2021 EPA 1000 1002 SM 5210B SM 2320B EPA 300 0 9056 EPA 300 0 9056 EPA 200 8 6010B 6020 EPA 300 0 9056 EPA 300 0 9056 EPA 300 0 9056 EPA 300 0 9056 SM 4500 S F EPA 9030B SM 4500 5032 SM 4500 NH3 E B SM4500 NH3 EG SM 4500 P E SM 4500 P E EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020 EPA 200 7 200 8 6010B 6020
220. ne X 3 3 Dimethylbenzidine X X Dinoseb X X Disulfoton X Hexachlorobenzene X Hexachlorobutadiene Hexachloroethane Indeno 1 2 3 cd pyrene X Kepone X 1 3 Dinitrobenzene or m dinitrobenzene Methyl parathion N Nitrosodi n butylamine X N Nitrosodiethylamine X N Nitrosodimethylamine X N Nitroso di n propylamine X N Nitroso N methylethylamine X N Nitrosopyrrolidine X Pentachloronitrobenzene Acrolein Bromodichloromethane Chloroform 1 2 Dibromo 3 chloropropane Dibromochloromethane 1 2 Dibromoethane 1 4 Dichloro 2 butene Methacrylonitrile Aldrin HCH alpha or Alpha BHC HCH beta or Beta BHC HCH technical or Delta BHC Dieldrin P PS PS ox ox P lt PX PS S PS PS PC PS PS Heptachlor Heptachlor epoxide Toxaphene X PCBs X X 7 8 REVISED August 1 2008 7 2 Data Generation and Acquisition The following sections address aspects of data generation and acquisition to ensure that appropriate methods for sampling measurement and analysis data collection or generation data handling and QC objectives are employed and documented 7 21 Sampling Process Design The sampling plan for the project is included as Section 6 0 of this Phase 1 Work Plan and includes the types and numbers of samples required design of sampling network sam
221. ng Packaging and Shipment 3 5 7 Upon receipt the laboratory completes and duplicates the form and returns a copy of the form with the analytical data 3 6 Field Instrument Calibration Log 3 6 1 Acceptable calibration and calibration verification for each instrument shall be documented linking this record with affected sample measurements 3 6 2 Results of instrument calibrations are recorded on the Instrument Calibration Form Attachment E in the Field Logbook including Specific instrument and instrument number Time and date of calibrations Names of analyst performing calibrations Specific standards used Whether successful calibration occurred and Corrective actions taken dE 3 6 3 Note expiration date for all standards and reagents 3 7 Documentation Specific to Drum Sampling 3 7 1 Record the following information for each drum sampled 1 Type of drum and description of contents 2 Drum number if applicable 4 of 5 Revision 1 September 2005 3 7 2 3 7 3 SAMPLE CONTROL AND FIELD DOCUMENTATION SOP 120 Terrain and drainage condition Label wording or other markings Dimensional extent of leaks or spills associated with each drum Drum location or location map Qvo mou Record the following information for the drum sample s 1 Description of phases color crystals powder sludge etc 2 Stratified layers sampled including aliquot amounts for composites if applicable
222. ng data should be recorded for each sample Names of sample collectors Identification of sampling location and depth of sample Depth to groundwater at groundwater sampling locations Sample collection method Types and numbers of sample containers used Preservatives used Results of field analyses and Sample observations color turbidity odor soil type etc Qo OV UA d par 2 of 5 Revision 1 September 2005 SAMPLE CONTROL AND FIELD DOCUMENTATION SOP 120 3 3 4 3 3 5 3 3 6 3 3 7 3 3 8 The FTL or designee shall complete the Sampling Record by signing it thus documenting the collection of the sample An independent field team member shall review the record to ensure its completeness and accuracy For planned but not collected samples the FTL shall return the sampling record with the words not collected written across the forms ensuring all required signatures are applied Documentation specific to general soil sampling includes sample collection depth areal location of sample and sample collection device Attachment B Documentation of general sediment sampling includes sample collection depth areal location of sample and sample collection device Attachment B 3 4 Sample Labeling 3 4 1 342 343 A complete sample label shall be filled out for each sample Sample labels must identify the sample ID site sampler s initials sampling location depth time date and analyses
223. nsas specifically the north half of Section 3 Township 17 North Range 29 West of the Sonora quadrangle map see Figure 2 1 The legal description of the property below is from the permit modification application for Phase III of the landfill and indicates the property is approximately 180 acres in area which disagrees with acreage reported elsewhere The southeast quarter of the northwest quarter of Section 3 containing 40 acres more or less the south half of the northeast quarter of the northwest quarter of Section 3 containing 20 acres more or less and the north half of the north half of the northeast quarter of the southwest quarter of Section 3 containing 10 acres more or less all in Township 17 North Range 29 West The fractional northwest quarter of the northeast quarter of Section 3 containing 33 06 acres more or less and the fractional south half of the northeast quarter of Section 3 LESS AND EXCEPT the following described tract Beginning at the southwest corner of said 80 acre tract and running thence north 676 8 feet thence north 89 degrees 23 minutes east 708 5 feet thence south 676 3 feet thence south 89 degrees 23 minutes west 708 5 feet to the point of beginning leaving 67 73 acres more or less all in Township 17 North Range 29 West The southwest quarter of the northeast quarter of the northeast quarter of Section 3 containing 10 acres more or less All in Township 17 North Range 29 West 2 2 Descripti
224. nt 5 State injuries or other result if any form this accident 6 What treatment was given for these injuries 7 Employee examined Date Hour Corrective Action Taken 8 What steps have been taken to prevent similar occurrences and what further recommendations are made replace or repair equipment instruct employee or other action For Administrative Office Use rea aig re _ in fotos _ rt ig pem e 00007 APPENDIX C Comparison of Screening Levels to Reporting Levels Screening Levels Applicable to Arkansas Landfill Closure and Post Closure Activities Soil HHMSSL Industrial HHMSSL HHMSSL Method Indoor Industrial Method EPA Residential Detection AIC Reporting Regulation 2 HHMSSL Worker w o Outdoor HHMSSL Detection Method Water Limit Acute Criteria Residential Dermal Worker Limit Inorganics Note Concentrations in mg L Note Concentrations in mg Kg Chloride na 9056 0 165000 0 2 1 65E 00 2 0E 00 Sulfate na 9056 0 195000 0 2 1 95E 00 2 0E 00 Sulfide 18496 25 8 9030B 1 000
225. nt Services to be used in contract or proposal submissions Full control docu ments establishing company policy are approved by Laboratory management The original documents along with any revisions are maintained and traceable for a minimum of 10 years A copy of such documents used in contracts or proposal submissions will be maintained in the client files However the client will not automatically be supplied revisions of the submitted documents should they occur Lim ited document control procedures are employed for other relevant documents such as forms and organ izational charts These documents would be available through reviewing laboratory records however an individual or separate file is not created and maintained showing the original subsequent revisions or distribution Every controlled document form or book is assigned a unique identification usually a title form or book number and a creation revision date This unique identification is entered on a master list of documents along with a distribution list for each document to ensure that pertinent documents are made available wherever they are essential The status of each document active current revised or inac tive obsolete is indicated Each document and subsequent revisions must be reviewed and approved by authorized personnel prior to issue Personnel authorized to review and approve a document are to have access to all necessary information on which to base their review and
226. ntainer identification used in tracking the containers at the site 2 Contents i e soil purge water decontamination water 3 Accumulation start date and 4 The phrase Analysis Pending optional Containers will be temporarily stored at the facility pending laboratory analysis The storage and final disposition of containers will be documented on the container storage log sheet Attachment B 4 2 IDW Characterization 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 2 4 4 2 5 4 2 6 Groundwater analytical data will be used for disposal characterization of aqueous wastes The disposition of soil IDW will be based in the results of borehole soil analysis or collection of a composite sample of IDW contained in drums One composite sample will be collected for every 5 drums of IDW containing soil cuttings Where appropriate total values for the soil samples assuming they are greater than 0 5 solids will be divided by 20 for comparison with Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure TCLP regulatory levels Ref 1 A factor of 20 is used to account for the dilution that occurs in the TCLP test Groundwater and soil data that are below TCLP regulatory levels thus indicative of non hazardous waste will then be compared to EPA Region 6 HHMSSLs Ref 2 Soil samples having total concentrations indicating that TCLP levels will be exceeded will be further evaluated using TCLP analysis EPA Method 1311 for the applicable ana
227. number and its file documentation All standards must be stored under proper conditions and in containers that provide the greatest protec tion against deterioration and or contamination Stock and working standards solutions must be prepared as often as required by their stability and as stipulated in the method Standards will be checked regularly for signs of deterioration i e discolora tion formation of precipitates and changes in concentration Standard solutions will be properly 1 beled as to compound name concentration solvent date and analyst as noted in SOP STDREAG 13 1 2 Definitions of Standards Primary compound is a liquid or solid compound in a pure form obtained from a commercial distribu tor Stock standard is a standard prepared or obtained from the primary compound i e liquid or solid at a high concentration Page 34 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 13 CORPORATION Revision 19 LABORATORIES May 23 2007 Working standard is a standard used in the quantitation and calibration of the compounds of interest 13 1 3 Expiration of Standards Standards purchased from commercial sources as well as those from EPA or NIST are dated upon re ceipt Date of expiration will also be noted if available A standards expiration date supplied by the manufacturer will be used as a frame of reference for replacement
228. o 218 01 9 8270C 2949853 0211000 29 1 5E 01 7 8E 02 2 3E 02 8 0E 00 1 5E 02 6 6E 01 __ _ __ ee Di n butyl phthalate 84 74 2 82770 098600 sd 6 6E 02 6 6E 01 di n Octyl phthalate 117 84 0 82700 4 oeeo X 44EO2 69E90 A Jj Diallate 2303 16 4 8270 J 1fooo00 iof Dibenz ah anthracene 53 70 3 82770 132 64 9 8270C 12166667 059200 15E 02 25 03 17 0 3 3 Dichlorobenzidine 91 94 1 82770 _66 0 _6 6E 01 1 40E02 amp 6 E 01 7 8E 01 2 4 Dichlorophenol 120 83 2 82700 109500000 0 462000 10 18E 02 61E 03 21E 03 5 0E 02 3 1E 02 6 6E 01 2 6 Dichlorophenol 87 65 0 8270C 10 000000 Of 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 Diethyl phthalate 84 66 2 8270 29200 00000 0 483000 10 49E 04 10E 05 10E 0 3 3E 02 6 6E 01 zz x Saas Pe ae Dimethoate 60 51 5 827700 20 000000 20 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 Dimethyl phthalate 131 11 3 82706 __ 365000 0000 0 50100 10 10E 05 1 0E 05 1 0E 05 3 4E 02 6 6E 01 CS PCT __ 7 12 Dimethyibenz ajanthracene 57 97 6 82700 3 3 Dimethylbenzidine 119 93 7 82700 10 000000 8 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 2 5E 00 83E 01 6 6E 01 2 4 Dimethylphenol 105 67 9 8270C 730 000000 0 776000 e 1 2E 03 41E 04 1
229. o 0 998 For ICP AES instruments a blank and at least one standard must be used For ICPMS a Daily Instru ment Check solution shall be analyzed The results for Rhodium must be gt 250 000 counts and double charged ions and oxides must be lt 3 Internal standardization is used for all ICPMS analyses to correct for instrument drift and physical inter ferences The absolute response of any one internal standard must not deviate more than 70 120 of the original response in the calibration blank If deviations greater than these are observed the sample con centrations are evaluated the samples are then either diluted re analyzed without dilutions or evaluated against a different internal standard For all instruments an Initial Calibration Verification ICV must be performed using EPA or other cer tified source standards The ICV standard is not digested and must be analyzed with each calibration for verification When measurements exceed the control limits or the target ranges supplied by the vendor the analysis must be terminated the problem corrected the instrument recalibrated and the calibration re verified If the ICV is not available or if a certified solution of an analyte is not available analysis shall be con ducted on an independent standard at a concentration other than that used for the calibration but within the calibration range An Initial Calibration Blank ICB must be analyzed at the beginning Continuing Calibr
230. o provide a standardized written program of policies pro cedures and instructions to demonstrate that adequate quality assurance and quality control procedures have been implemented to demonstrate that accountability of the data is maintained and to ensure traceability of analytical results 12 1 12 SOP PDF This SOP details the procedure for scanning and transmitting a report via the Internet as a PDF file 12 2 Instrumental Requirements The instrument manufacturers manual located in the laboratories serve as the definitive source for in strument set up analysis software requirements and programming as well as that of maintenance pro cedures The instrument s performance must meet the method criteria defined in the analytical method ology for which it is utilized Page 31 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 CORPORATION i AMERICAN l NTERPLEX Section 12 Revision 19 LABORATORIES May 23 2007 12 3 Biomonitoring Requirements Chronic tests follow the guidelines set forth in EPA 821 R 02 013 Short term Methods for Estimating the Chronic Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Freshwater Organisms Fourth Edition Oc tober 2002 for Methods 1000 and 1002 Acute tests follow the guidelines set forth in EPA 821 R 02 012 Methods for Measuring the Acute Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Freshwater and Marine Organisms Fifth Edition Oct
231. ober 2002 for Methods 2000 2002 and 2021 The following is a list of Standard Operating Procedures for Biomonitoring procedures These SOPs comply with EPA protocols state and federal regulatory agency requirements Specific information concerning filtered air light cycles and laboratory apparatus are addressed SOP 24CD SOP 24DP SOP 24PP SOP 48CD SOP 48DP SOP 48PP SOP 7CD SOP 7FH SOP EMBRYO SOP BIOCULT SOP DPCULT SOP BIOALG SOP BIOSYN SOP SHRIMP SOP BIOYCT SOP BIOGLASS 24 Hr Acute Toxicity Test Ceriodaphnia dubia 24 Hr Acute Toxicity Test Daphnia pulex 24 Hr Acute Toxicity Test Pimephales promelas 48 Hr Acute Toxicity Test Ceriodaphnia dubia 48 Hr Acute Toxicity Test Daphnia pulex 48 Hr Acute Toxicity Test Pimephales promelas 7 Day Static Renewal Survival and Reproduction Test Ceriodaphnia dubia 7 Day Static Renewal Survival and Growth Test Larval Fathead Minnow Pimephales pro melas The Culture of Pimephales promelas The Culture of Cladoceran Ceriodaphnia dubia The Culture of Daphnia pulex Selenastrum capricornutum Algal Cultures Preparation of Synthetic Water The Culture of Brine Shrimp Artemia spp Preparation of YCT for Feeding Ceriodaphnia dubia and Daphnia pulex Glassware cleaning for Biomonitoring 12 4 Traceability of Measurement The record keeping system must allow historical reconstruction of all laboratory activities that produced the resultant data The history of the sample mus
232. ol is zero The upper control limit is calculated as the average RPDs 3s 15 7 5 Interpretation of Control Charts The control chart distinguishes between random and assignable causes of variation Each point on a con trol chart represents a test of quality data hypothesis Critical to data validation and assessment is a thorough understanding of what constitutes an out of control situation The following criteria will be used to evaluate out of control analyses One or more batches outside the control limit 3s Arun of two or more consecutive batches outside warning limits 2s 15 7 6 Statistical Evaluation of Data Sets Evaluation of analytical data is accomplished using statistical tools such as test of significance These tests confirm data comparability and representativeness to historical data and to method requirements The data is looked at critically for errors and consistency by the use of known statistical techniques such as F test Chi square and Student s t test Questions on whether data sets are peers or from a different population are answered The appropriate computations for combining data sets to obtain a bet ter estimate of standard deviation of a population means are utilized Reference toxicant data for Biomonitoring Analyses is analyzed monthly and evaluated using point es timate analysis to establish calculated effect concentrations for trending observations Trends in organ ism sensitivity can then b
233. ollows Spiked Sample Concentration Sample Concentration x 100 Spike Concentration Added 15 3 Completeness For the data to be valid it must meet all the acceptance criteria including accuracy precision and any Other criteria specified by the analytical method Data validation procedures are employed to eliminate incorrect data acquired through data collection Page 49 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 15 CORPORATION tic LABORATORIES Revision 19 May 23 2007 The specific accuracy and precision level wili be dependent upon the type of sample matrix and the ana lytical method applied The laboratory s historical statistical control limits and method limits will be used as guidelines to validate the data generated Completeness of analytical effort can be numerically determined by the following equation C V T x 100 C Completeness of Analytical Effort V Number of valid samples analyzed T Number of samples 15 4 Representativeness Data generated by the laboratory shall be representative of the overall population of samples collected and analyzed It shall be representative of the laboratory s database of accuracy and precision measure ments for a given parameter matrix and analytical method 15 5 Comparability Data generated shall be used to evaluate completeness of extensive monitoring
234. on of Current Conditions Approximately 40 acres were originally permitted for waste disposal The Class 4 landfill is located east of Area 1 of the Class 1 landfill as shown on Figure 2 1 2 1 Location Washington County QUOS ANSA Tala SS 4 ES SSRs e o BSS S i LN NC N Aso WZ ORIGINAL DISPOSAL AREA APPROXIMATE 4 PROPOSED EXPANSION AREA APPROXIMATE Scole in Feet L__ LANDFILL TRACT APPROXIMATE H Ri projects 3013 202 cad dwg 3013 202fg21 dwg 7 w _ gt Figure 2 1 Disposal areas 2 2 REVISED August 1 2008 The site is currently being used to pasture cattle The general topography of the Class 1 landfill area is relatively flat but steep slopes and ravines bound portions of the site Differential settling in the areas used for trench fill has resulted in an undulating surface with fissuring of the surface and depressions as deep as 10 ft Gas vents and leachate wells many are broken off or otherwise damaged are located in the trench fill area A 3 inch natural gas distribution line owned and maintained by Arkansas Western Gas Company crosses the site The surrounding land use is primarily rural with some residential along with cattle and poultry production Several single family dwellings are located adjacent to the southern boundary of the Class 1 area 2 2 1 Topography and Surface Water Flow Paths The topographic relief of
235. one hour After stabilization each probe will be monitored utilizing a LANDTEC GEM 2000 portable gas analyzer and the air will be analyzed for percent methane percent carbon dioxide percent lower explosive limit LEL for methane and percent oxygen content Data on the date time and specific location of the monitoring will be recorded Because atmospheric pressure and local weather can impact LFG migration the atmospheric pressure and weather conditions encountered during monitoring will also be recorded Three follow up monitoring events will be conducted at approximately 30 day intervals after installation Data from all monitoring events will be tabulated to assess if trends in the presence of LFG can be determined If LFG is determined to be migrating offsite additional sampling and analysis may be conducted to determine the overall impact of gas migration 6 6 7 Site Survey At the completion of the site investigation locations of onsite seeps surface soil samples and boring monitoring wells will be surveyed and a boundary survey will be conducted Horizontal coordinates will be surveyed relative to the Arkansas State Plane Coordinate System and vertical coordinates will be surveyed relative to the National Geodetic Vertical Datum NGVD of 1929 or North American Vertical Datum NAVD of 1988 Reference point elevations ground surface will be measured to the nearest 0 01 ft 6 6 8 Geotechnical Testing A geotechnical field and laborat
236. ore is to achieve detection limits that are at or below these screening levels where USEPA SW 846 methods and quantification limits allow The proposed methods MCLs and Region 6 residential HHMSSLs and laboratory practical quantitation limits PQLs i e laboratory reporting levels are shown in Appendix C The laboratory can achieve the listed PQLs under optimal conditions using the analytical methods shown in the table The laboratory s PQL may be three to ten times higher than the method detection limit MDL and is highly matrix dependent and may not be below an applicable screening level Under less than optimal conditions samples may contain constituents that cause or contribute to analytical interferences that can significantly affect reported detection limits Results that are reported between the MDL and PQL will have to be qualified as J values Although J flagged data may not be accurate or precise they are considered useable for screening purposes and may be carried forward to further clarify if the detected chemical is a risk driver Typically the maximum concentration of a chemical is used as a surrogate for long term exposure in the risk assessment and is expected to result in a lessened chance that a chemical posing exposure of potential health concern will be removed from further consideration As summarized by Table 7 3 several PQLs are above applicable screening levels These results will be addressed and discussed in
237. ore reporting samples results regarding calibra tion the method blank LCS surrogate recovery matrix spike and matrix spike duplicate recovery re sults The first evaluation of acceptability is made according to the requirements stated in the method The second is based upon any special project requirements Appendix III and IV presents a summary of the definition purpose and evaluation of the major quality control checks required for the various methods along with flow charts used in data review and validation Additional verification by the Director of Quality Assurance will be accomplished through routine au dits of the data collection and flow procedures and by monitoring the results of Quality Control check samples The minimum review and validation requirements for each audit conducted by the Director of Quality Assurance include the following Three point calibration and one calibration check standard or as method appropriates Continuing calibration check using EPA or NBS reference nw Q Quality control check sample included in each analysis whenever available Page 60 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 15 CORPORATION R i LABORATORIES evision 19 May 23 2007 a One reagent blank per matrix and per concentration level for every sample batch ana lyzed that is one per 20 s
238. ory investigation will be performed to evaluate the onsite soils for use in any modifications to the landfill facility and stormwater control devices Test pits and possibly shallow borings will be advanced in the upper 10 to 20 ft bgs to evaluate the soil profile around the existing waste areas and undisturbed areas on the Parsons property The soils will be logged in the field using the USCS and will be collected using ASTM standards ASTM D 2488 The samples will be submitted to a geotechnical testing laboratory for analysis of physical characteristics including 1 Natural moisture content ASTM D 2216 6 15 e a pa REVISED August 1 2008 Atterberg Limits ASTM D 4318 Grain size distribution ASTM D 421 and ASTM D 1140 Standard Proctor ASTM D 698 and Remolded Permeability ASTM D 5084 6 16 REVISED August 1 2008 7 0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROJECT PLAN This section of the Phase 1 Work Plan has been prepared to serve as the Quality Assurance Project Plan QAPP 7 1 Project Management The following sections address project management documenting that the project has a defined goal that the participants understand the goal and the approach to the be used and the planning outputs 7 1 1 Title and Approvals Title Quality Assurance Project Plan for Phase 1 Work Plan Landfill Closure and Post Closure Activities at the Northwest Arkansas Waste Management Inc Parsons Class 1 Landfill This
239. ous resolution of complaints At American Interplex Corporation the Laboratory Director working with the Director of Quality Assurance Project Manager Client Services Sample Management and the Laboratory Section Manager s handles Sys tematic problems The Laboratory Director works with Sample Management to resolve complaints concerning container orders shipping and expected report dates with Client Services to resolve Page 57 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 15 CORPORATION 5 LABORATORIES Revision 19 May 23 2007 quote invoicing issues with Project and Laboratory Managers to resolve project specifications raw data method and regulatory requirements The staff will document in LIMs or on the administrative work sheet the client complaints investigative finding resolution which may be inclusive of re analysis and reissuing a report or invoice If the report or invoice is edited the reissued report will so specify and indicate a description of what was edited 15 8 4 1 A review of the data will result in one of the following scenarios depending upon the as sessment 15 8 4 1 1 If during the review process a transcription or calculation error occurred a revised report will be issued with the corrected result s 15 8 4 1 2 If during the review process no determinant error is detected and the
240. performed on a rotating schedule that is established throughout the year The schedule may change as situations in the laboratory warrant The objectives and schedule of the audits are communicated to the laboratory groups being assessed in ad vance of the audit At the completion of the audit a debriefing is held to outline the findings including identification of positive performances to discuss areas of deficiencies and to provide for questions and Page 44 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 14 CORPORATION Revision 19 LABORATORIES May 23 2007 response from all parties involved A written audit report will be provided with 14 calendar days of the date of the audit report The audit response from the laboratory areas must the follow the original audit report and provided to all individuals involved Where a corrective action and preventative action report is generated the response must detail an investigative implementation plan and target date of comple tion 14 4 5 Data Audits are routinely performed and documented to ensure that project records meet project requirements as described in method SOPs project plans or other documented requirements The data audit is used to identify any laboratory errors that may have occurred Significant issues found in the course of the audit are brought to the attention of appropriate personnel
241. pling locations and frequencies sample matrices and analytical parameters The rationale for the sampling plan as prepared was to investigate potential pathways and to evaluate impacts to the environment from a municipal solid waste landfill 7 2 2 Sampling Methods Procedures and equipment for collecting samples are described in Section 6 0 and or the SOPs included in Appendix A of this Phase 1 Work Plan Preservation requirements decontamination procedures sampling methods sample containers sample volumes and maximum holding times are described in Section 6 0 of this Phase 1 Work Plan Analytical support will be provided by AIC During the course of the investigation it will be the responsibility of the FTN Project Manager and sampling team members to see that sampling procedures are followed and all measurement data meet prescribed acceptance criteria In the event a problem is discovered e g equipment malfunction prompt action will be taken to correct the problem Actions taken will be noted in field logbooks Samples and monitoring data that are collected and later deemed to be invalid will be identified as such and the need for resampling will be determined by ADEQ and FTN Project Managers 7 2 3 Sample Handling and Custody 7 2 3 1 Purpose Background This section of the QAPP describes procedures necessary to ensure that 7 9 REVISED August 1 2008 e Samples are collected transferred stored and analyzed by aut
242. port cannot be located A subsequent Masters degree thesis by Mr Goodman dated January 1985 and titled A Hydrogeologic Evaluation of the Northwest Arkansas Waste Management Landfill Washington County Arkansas includes the results of the initial hydrogeologic investigation as well as supplemental investigations by Mr Goodman The report includes the results of soil borings surface resistivity surveys and dye tracing A structural contour map of the top of the bedrock surface was developed from data at 14 boring locations The Soil Conservation Service and 4 2 REVISED August 1 2008 Cooper Consultants Inc Cooper of Bentonville conducted soils investigations at the site for Mr Parsons in 1982 McClelland Engineers Inc McClelland was retained by Washington County and submitted a report on March 28 1983 after onsite testing of soils Logs of the McClelland borings and laboratory data sheets are available Generalized boring logs are available in reports for some of the existing wells but standard boring logs for each well are not Depth to bedrock and soil bedrock characteristics are described in Goodman s thesis and other miscellaneous reports Existing geologic information will be supplemented and refined with any additional information from borings advanced during subsequent investigations It is unknown whether an area at the site was ever used for wastewater sludge composting operations If such an area can be loca
243. ported vertically and all sensors should be cleaned by gently wiping probe surfaces with a Q tip and deionized or distilled water if needed 4 1 1 3 Between sensor checks and calibrations the Hydrolab cup and probes should be rinsed 3 times with tap water then 3 times with deionized or distilled water 4 1 4 Before each calibration the cup and probes should be rinsed with the calibration standard to be used and then the cup should be filled with the calibration solution so that the appropriate probe is completely immersed 4 1 1 5 Follow these calibration steps using the Surveyor Setup Cal gt gt Calibrate gt gt Sonde gt gt Scroll to desired parameter gt gt Select gt gt Enter calibration standard value gt gt Select gt gt Done 4 1 1 6 When a calibration procedure is completed correctly the Surveyor will display the message Calibration Successful If the calibration is not completed correctly the Surveyor will display the message Calibration Failed If calibration attempts repeatedly fail after cleaning probes and using new calibration standard solutions call Hydrolab technical support at 1 800 949 3766 4 2 Temperature Hydrolab temperature sensors are factory calibrated and no temperature calibration is performed A temperature check is performed by placing an NBS traceable thermometer in the cup with one of the calibrating solutions The thermometer reading is r
244. pouring deionized water directly into the sample container 2 of 3 Revision 1 September 2005 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLES SOP 150 6 4 6 5 Trip Blanks Trip blanks contain reagent grade water and are prepared by the laboratory and received along with requested sample containers Do not open the trip blanks Trip blanks are analyzed for VOCs Split Samples Water Fill the sample container from consecutive sample volumes from the same sampling device If the sampling device does not hold enough sample to fill the sample container use the following procedure 1 Fill the first container with half of the sample and pour the remaining sample into the second container 2 Obtain an additional sample pour the first half into the second container and pour the remaining portion into the first container 3 Continue with Steps 1 and 2 above until both containers are filled 7 0 QC DOCUMENTATION 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 The Field Team Leader FTL is responsible for maintaining permanent QC sample records At a minimum the daily log should include deviations if applicable type of analyte free water used and a listing of equipment and locations where blanks were prepared Duplicate samples should be shown on Sampling Record Forms Chain of Custody documentation should be completed 8 0 REFERENCES 8 1 EPA Region 4 2001 Environmental Investigations Standard Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Man
245. priate ecological sediment screening levels such as USEPA Region 4 and or USEPA Region 5 freshwater sediment screening levels or other appropriate criteria such as the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration s Screening Quick Reference Table In addition background values for sediment will be used to evaluate concentrations of inorganic chemicals in sediment Chemicals present in sediment at background concentrations are generally not considered chemicals of potential concern A letter report outlining the risk screening procedure and results of the comparisons will be presented for review by ADEQ No further risk assessment work will be performed unless authorized by ADEQ 8 2 REVISED August 1 2008 9 0 DATA EVALUATION AND REPORTS 9 1 Data Presentation It is anticipated that Microsoft Excel will be used to manage data for this project because the laboratory can readily provide data in this electronic format and data can be compared to specific requirements of the QAPP during verification and data validation Analytical data and other field monitoring data will be compiled into tables at a minimum with emphasis placed on data exceeding background MCLs or Region 6 residential HHMSSLs effective at the time of the evaluation Site maps will be developed that include one or more of the following as appropriate 1 Plan view maps showing waste disposal areas lineaments seeps springs wells ponds and other site feat
246. r Aromatic Hydrocarbons EPA 625 8270C 610 8100 Chlorinated Herbicides EPA 8151A 8321A Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure EPA 1311 Ignitability EPA 1010 Corrosivity EPA 1110 Purge and Trap EPA 5030B Separatory Funnel Extraction EPA 3510C Organics by GC EPA 8015B Metal Digestions EPA 3010A 3005A 3051 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 Page 28 of 121 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 CORPORATION LABORATORIES AMERICAN INTERPLEX Parameter Ultrasonic Extraction Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons Diesel Range Organics Section 11 Revision 19 May 23 2007 Method EPA 3550B EPA 1664A AR TPH EPA 3510C 8015B DRO OK Gasoline Range Organics EPA 5030B 8015B GRO OK Acid Base Partition Cleanup EPA 3650B Silica Gel Cleanup EPA 3630C Florisil Cleanup EPA 3550B Salinity SM 2520B Total Dissolved Solids SM 2540C Total Suspended Solids SM 2540 USGS 3765 Total Solids SM 2540B Volatile Solids SM 2540E Settleable Solids SM 2540F Odor SM 2150B Turbidity EPA 180 1 MBAS SM 5540C Total Residual Chlorine SM 4500 8082 600 481 045 Color SM 2120B Temperature SM 2550B 11 8 Method Development The methods presented are performed by American Interplex Corporation to meet regulatory require ments and the needs of our clients This list does not incorporate all the regulatory methodologies avail able but rather a selected group of methods that a
247. r horizontal control and datum determination are completed and that the necessary information is entered on the well completion record Attachment A ATTACHMENTS Attachment A Well Completion Record REFERENCES 8 1 EPA 1991 Handbook of Suggested Practices for the Design and Installation of Ground water Monitoring Wells Environmental Monitoring System Laboratory Office of Research and Development 8 2 1986 RCEA Groundwater Monitoring Technical Enforcement Guidance Document OSWER Washington D C 5305 86055 Revision 2 June 2007 Job Name Job Number Filter Pack Ground Surface Grout L Bentonite Datum Elevation ____ Datum for Water Level Measurement _ Screen Diameter amp Material Riser Diameter amp Material Drilling Method Depth to Top of Bentonite Seal Depth to Top of Lower Granular Material Granular Backfill MONITORING WELL INSTALLATION RECORD Well Number Installation Date Location Surface Elevation Slot Size Borehole Diameter FTN Representative Drilling Contractor Lockable Cover Vented Cap Well Protector Concrete Stickup NASI WAS NAN Solid Riser Length of Solid Flush Joint riser Total Depth of Monitoring Well Screen Length of Screen mum 2 Cap Not to Scale WELL DEVELOPM
248. r sampling trace organics The water sample can be collected directly by dipping the sample container into the water and filling removing and capping it This direct grab method requires the exterior of the sample container to be rinsed after collection to avoid spreading possible contamination Examples of equipment that may be used for depth grab sampling include Kemmerer Niskin Van Dorn double check valve bailers and similar samplers Samples may be collected using automated samplers There are many types of automatic samplers Follow manufacturer s instructions when using an automated sampler 5 0 PROCEDURE 5 1 9 2 3 3 The Field Team Leader FTL shall monitor the implementation of these procedures document procedure deviations SOP 120 and refer to the site work plan sampling plan or other appropriate plan to locate sampling sites along the surface water body The FTL shall insure that field instruments are properly calibrated and records of calibration are maintained SOP 120 The FTL or field team member shall decontaminate all sampling equipment before taking the first sample and between sampling locations SOP 130 2 of 6 Revision 1 September 2005 SURFACE WATER SAMPLING SOP 330 5 4 The FTL or field team member should place a reference marker that includes the location identification number as close to the sampling location as possible for survey purposes or collect and record GPS coordinates
249. r to a purge water collection container 4 2 2 Circulator The Hydrolab circulator should be on so that water flowing through the cell moves evenly around the probes and sediment or debris is cleared from the cell The circulator is turned on by following the Surveyor prompts Setup Cal gt gt Setup gt gt Sonde gt gt Circltr Off On gt gt Select gt gt 1 gt gt Select gt gt Done The circulator should then begin to rotate and the Surveyor should indicate Setup Successful 4 of 5 Revision 1 September 2005 FIELD TESTING USING THE HYDROLAB MINISONDE AND SOP 322 DATASONDE WITH A FLOW THROUGH CELL 4 2 3 Pumping rate Water is pumped through the flow through cell until parameters stabilize according to SOP 321 Well Purging 5 0 RECORDS The Field Team Leader FTL is responsible for preparing the following records in accordance with SOP 120 Sample Control and Field Documentation e Instrument Calibration Form e Sampling Record Form e Daily Log Form 6 0 REFERENCES 6 1 Hydrolab Corporation 1997 Datasonde 4 and MiniSonde Water Quality Microprobes User s Manual Revision D 6 2 Hydrolab Corporation 2002 Hydrolab Water Quality Monitoring Instrumentation Training Seminar Handbook 5 of 5 Revision 1 September 2005 SURFACE WATER SAMPLING SOP 330 1 0 PURPOSE This Standard Operating Procedure SOP presents the procedures to be used to consistently collect repre
250. raints of approved EPA methodology Cop ies of these SOPs have been provided to Laboratory Managers and are available to all laboratory per sonnel Strict adherence to the correct procedure is required and documented in each of the SOPs which are continually monitored and updated as changes or new developments occur The following de scribes our current SOPs 12 1 Operational Requirements 12 1 1 SOP WATER Laboratory Pure Water Supply Type IV deionized water and Type I water are available in the laboratory This SOP describes the difference in the usage ofthe two and maintenance requirements 12 1 2 SOP FIELD Field Sample Collection All data must be traceable back to the representativeness of the sample analyzed This written sampling procedure and along with other supporting SOPs Sample DO pH etc describe the methods of sample collections preservation on site measurements and Chain of Custody documentation 12 1 3 SOP BOTTLES Sample Bottles and Preservation This describes the process for cleaning sample bottles and the technique for chemical preservation additions 12 1 4 SOP SAMPLE Sample Handling and Documentation Unique sample identification is assigned immediately upon receipt at the laboratory The process of logging in and distribution is described in this SOP which also details sample containers and storage 12 1 5 SOP STDREAG Standards and Chemical Reagents Standards and reagents prepared in the laboratory a
251. rds based upon the analytical method requested Calibration standards must include concentrations at or below the regulatory limit decision level The lowest standard concentration shall be approximately three 3 times the limit of detection and defines the reporting limit for which quantifiable data can be reported The upper level of linearity of the curve shall be determined The range of standard concentrations will be based upon the range of linearity column capacity and detector capabilities Linearity of the instrument must be checked by calculating the Relative Standard Deviations RSDs for the compounds of interest The Relative Standard Deviation of the Response Factor RF must be con sistent with RSDs 1096 for EPA 600s 2096 for EPA 8000s specified by the method Alternately linear regression shall be used for calibration The requirement for an acceptable initial calibration is a correlation coefficient equal to or greater than 0 995 The calibration curve or Response Factor is verified by the analysis of initial calibration verification standard obtained from a second manufacturer or lot if the lot can be demonstrated as prepared inde pendently from other lots The initial calibration must be within 25 of the concentration A con tinuing calibration check standard prepared from the same source as the standards is analyzed at the be ginning every ten samples and at the end of each analytical batch The concentration of the
252. re logged and assigned an identification number for the purpose of inventory and traceability 12 1 6 SOP WEIGHT Weighing Instruments Analytical balances are used throughout the laboratory This SOP de Page 30 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 12 CORPORATION LABORATORIES Revision 19 May 23 2007 scribes the proper procedure of daily calibration and recordkeeping 12 1 7 SOP GLASS Glassware The accurate measurement of trace levels of pollutants requires clean and calibrated volumetric glassware This SOP describes the procedure of cleaning techniques for different types of glassware used for special parameters 12 1 8 SOP SOP Standard Operating Procedures SOP This SOP describes SOP preparation and formatting AIC policy manuals for QA QC and Safety will serve as a primary reference in SOPs preparation to prevent the necessity of updating multiple documents 12 1 9 SOP INCUB Incubators Refrigerators and Ovens All temperature controlled devices are monitored to insure proper storage temperature The calibration of thermometers for the accurate measurement of tempera ture required in the proper analysis of parameters is clearly described in this procedure 12 1 10 SOP CALC Defines the calculations performed for various analyses throughout the laboratory 12 1 11 SOP DOC The objectives this document are as follows t
253. related accidents and from exposure to hazardous constituents 3 0 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 1 DOT approved drums and containers 2 Indelible marker i e Sharpie or paint markers 3 Clear adhesive tape 4 Hazardous Waste Labels where applicable 5 Hammer ratchet socket and crescent wrenches 6 Plastic buckets and 7 Container Storage Log sheet 4 0 PROCEDURE 4 1 Management of Soil and Aqueous IDW 4 1 1 The Project Manager or designee will prepare a site specific IDW plan checklist Attachment A which will be taken into the field by the Field Team Leader FTL 4 1 2 The Field Team Leader FTL shall monitor the proper implementation of this procedure 4 1 3 The FTL and appropriate facility personnel will identify container management and temporary storage areas prior to the start of field operations that generate wastes 4 1 4 Excess soil will be placed in DOT approved drums or containers separate from drums containing purge and decontamination water 4 1 5 Lids and gaskets and or bungs will be placed on containers and secured when not in active use 4 1 6 Each container of waste generated shall be individually labeled An indelible marker and adhesive label may be used for this purpose or 1 of 4 Revision 1 September 2005 MANAGEMENT OF INVESTIGATION DERIVED SOP 140 WASTES IDW information may be placed directly on the container with a paint marker Information placed on containers shall include 1 The drum or co
254. rele vant factors A monthly QA report is prepared and submitted to the Laboratory Director and President The report includes the frequency and number of corrective actions revised reports and client complaints and is used to assess the effectiveness of the quality system Specific components of this report are 15 9 1 Audits Results of internal and external system audits performed The number of data audits per formed percent of total packages per month plus any additional issues 15 9 2 Revised Reports Revised Invoices Client Complaints section provides information on the fre quency of revised reports and the total number of client complaints issues and resolution 15 9 3 Certification Parameter changes are noted 15 9 4 Proficiency Testing results with identification of unacceptable results reason and resolution Identification of repeat failures or significant problems must be addressed 15 9 5 Miscellaneous QA and Operation Issues as they relate to reports regulatory compliance issues general concerns and recommendations for change 15 10 Data Review and Validation The review of data quality involves several levels of evaluation In general the analysts and the Labora tory Managers will be responsible for reviewing and validating the data relative to instrument calibra tion standard preparation method blanks raw data calculations and transcriptions When evaluating batch QC the analyst makes a sequence of decisions bef
255. ria of insert criteria The wording can differ as long as the data is flagged appropriately Final reports cannot be generated unless corrective actions have been reviewed by the Director of Quality Assurance or her his designee 15 8 3 Sample Receipt Form Compliance Any discrepancies observed during the initial assessment are recorded on the sample receipt form gener ated and Chain of Custody documents All potential problems with a sample shipment are addressed and discussed with the client When resolved the login process will commence and analysis may be gin Receipt of samples exceeding the regulatory requirements for temperature in inappropriate contain ers out of holding time or inappropriately collected as documented by the chain of custody require that a statement be included on the analytical reports that identifies any discrepancies in the transport process and that the acceptability of the data in meeting regulatory requirements may be compromised 15 8 3 1 Environmental samples received with incomplete chain of custody documentation will be identified on the final report that documentation is incomplete AIC will supply client a chain of custody template and instructions for future sample submissions at the clients request 15 8 4 Procedure for Dealing with Complaints Addressing complaint is a normal function of conducting business and a valuable tool to improve ser vices to and relationships with clients The goal is expediti
256. rrective action taken resolution of problem acknowledgement of the corrective action by the Analyst Laboratory Manager and the Director of Quality Assurance 15 8 44 Tracking Components of this Customer Non Conformance Report database consist of a Customer Non Conformance Log briefly describing the reason its current status a categorizing field for sorting by type of deficiency i e lab error invoicing department analysis and analyst and the ability to electronically notify all individuals assigned with tasks meeting schedules compliance sched ule resolution Monthly evaluation of these categories will assist in providing a long term solution and in some circumstances will require the generation of a Corrective and Preventative Action Report 15 8 1 for implementation of practices and policies including that of additional training Page 58 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 15 CORPORATION Revision 19 L RIES ABORATORI May 23 2007 15 8 5 Audits Performance Evaluation Non Conformance Reports Corrective action documentation will also be prepared as a result of an audit finding or in the event that a Performance Evaluation sample fails to meet criteria 15 8 5 1 Corrective actions for out of compliance issues from an audit are documented on the Corrective and Preventative Action section of the audit report Internal audit fin
257. s and preparing project reports Wenck will assist FTN with the data evaluation development of remedial options and preparation of project reports CTEH will conduct the risk evaluation The objectives of the closure and post closure activities for this site are to 1 Determine to what extent the release of contaminants has impacted the subject property and surrounding property and groundwater surface water in the vicinity 2 Determine if landfill gas LFG is migrating offsite Determine the risks to human health and the environment associated with the contaminants and 4 After site characterization is completed depending on the findings ADEQ will decide on design and implementation of remedial measures The Scope of Work includes completing the project initiation and planning conducting field investigations evaluating data and risk to human health and the environment and preparing a closure and post closure work activities report that includes recommended corrective measures 1 1 REVISED August 1 2008 2 0 SITE DESCRIPTION AND HISTORY This section includes a general description of the Parsons site A legal description is included as well as a discussion of current site conditions 2 1 Site Location and Legal Description According to available records the site is located on approximately 140 acres approximately 3 miles east of Springdale and about mile north of Highway 412 East in Washington County Arka
258. s consistent with the analytes of interest Refer to the site specific work plan for information on sample container size and construction and preservation and holding time requirements For information on sampling equipment cleaning requirements see SOP 130 Decontamination of Drilling and Sampling Equipment For information on documentation requirements see SOP 120 Sample Control and Field Documentation lof6 Revision 1 September 2005 SURFACE WATER SAMPLING SOP 330 3 5 Other equipment and materials may include water quality meters disposable gloves wooden stakes and flagging boots waders and pH paper 4 0 SAMPLING METHODS 4 1 4 2 4 3 44 4 5 One method for collecting a surface water sample is to use a peristaltic pump The pump system allows the use of a filtration assembly with the pump and sample container With this method surface samples are filtered if needed and collected directly with minimal elapsed time The acceptable tubing is medical grade silicon which is decontaminated or replaced after every sample Ref 7 1 An alternative method is to collect surface water as grab samples Samples can be collected using a transfer device constructed of polyethylene Teflon stainless steel or glass The transfer device is used to transfer liquid wastes from surface waters to a sample container Field personnel must avoid using metal transfer devices for trace metal analysis or plastic devices fo
259. se the sample in the trench by using a pre cleaned spoon spatula or equivalent to clean away the soil that came in contact with the backhoe bucket There is a safety issue with collecting samples from a trench deeper than 5 feet Adequate protective system is required except when excavations are less than 5 feet in depth and examination of the ground by a competent person provides no indication of a potential cave in Samples can be collected from the bucket or soil piles at the surface 6 2 Use a second pre cleaned utensil to actually collect the sample from the trench backhoe bucket or soil pile 6 3 Follow procedures in Section 4 3 through 4 6 to collect the sample 7 0 BUCKET AUGERS AND HOLLOW CORERS Suitable to reach soils from approximately 12 inches to a point when using the implement becomes impractical 7 1 Push and rotate the auger into soil until the bucket is filled 7 2 Addition of a non contaminating sleeve may allow an undisturbed soil sample to be obtained If use remove the sleeve from the auger and cap 7 3 If the auger hole is prone to collapse due to low cohesion in some soils insert a temporary PVC casing into the hole The casing prevents hole collapse and minimizes cross contamination between soil zones as the auger is advanced After collecting the samples remove the temporary casing if used and fill the hole with excavated soil 3 of 7 Revision 1 September 2005 8 0 9 0 SOIL SAMPLING SOP 310 7 4
260. sentative surface water samples for site assessments Each collection event must be performed so samples are neither contaminated nor altered from improper handling 2 0 GENERAL 2 1 2 2 2 3 24 2 5 2 6 2 7 This SOP shall be used in conjunction with the site specific health and safety plan HASP to help ensure that personnel performing the work are protected from equipment related accidents and from exposure to hazardous constituents This SOP covers general surface water sampling for chemical analyses Sampling locations types and analytical parameters and other requirements are specified in site specific sampling and analysis plans SAPs There are several methods for collecting surface water samples The Field Team Leader FTL shall have the flexibility to decide which one of the methods in Section 4 0 is most appropriate based on conditions at the time of sampling When using watercraft take samples near the bow away and upwind from any gasoline outboard engine Orient watercraft so that bow is positioned in the upstream direction When wading collect samples upstream from the body Avoid disturbing sediments in immediate area of sample collection Collect water samples prior to taking sediment samples when obtaining both from the same site Collect surface water samples from downstream towards upstream 3 0 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 Use sampling equipment constructed of material
261. sessment are recorded on the sample receipt form gener ated and Chain of Custody documents potential problems with a sample shipment are addressed and discussed with the client When resolved the login process will commence and analysis may be gin Receipt of samples exceeding the regulatory requirements for temperature in inappropriate contain ers out of holding time or inappropriately collected as documented by the chain of custody require that a statement be included on the analytical reports that identifies any discrepancies in the transport process and that the acceptability of the data in meeting regulatory requirements may be compromised During the login process each sample is given a unique laboratory code and a worksheet is generated The worksheet provides the client information sample descriptions sample matrix information required analyses sample collection dates analysis due dates and other pertinent information This worksheet is reviewed by client services for accuracy completeness and consistency of requested analyses and for client project objectives Laboratory security and access is important in maintaining the integrity of samples received Access to the laboratory is limited to staff except for the reception area and sample receiving area which are manned during business hours and locked at all other times Page 24 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 F
262. specific to sample matrix are eliminated and it ensures the correctness of the analysis 14 5 2 Internal Audit Samples are similar to Laboratory Control samples except that the true value of the target analyte is not known to the analyst These types of samples may be purchased or prepared by the Director of Quality Assurance or the Laboratory Manager 14 5 3 External Performance Evaluation Samples are often referred to as proficiency test samples and used for laboratory certification by various regulatory agencies Proficiency test samples are ana lyzed every six months with the laboratory participating in at least two studies per year for four 4 ana lytical results per analyte The samples are supplied and the results submitted to an outside regulatory approved source During the submittal process American Interplex Corporation authorizes the profi ciency test provider to release the results to designated agencies For all these agencies AIC is required to respond to any unacceptable test results In some cases AIC will be required to analyze additional proficiency samples for the failed parameter 14 5 4 Reference Toxicants are performed routinely to validate Biomonitoring test organism sensitiv ity If reference toxicant test results are outside of expected ranges the tests initiated with substandard organisms are of suspected quality Testing conditions and methods are identical to those used in com pliance testing Acute refer
263. ssippian age Boone Formation McFarland 1998 describes the Boone Formation and the St Joe member of the Boone Formation as follows BOONE FORMATION LIMESTONE CHERT Age Early and Middle Mississippian Period Distribution Northern Arkansas Ozark Plateaus southwestern Missouri and eastern Oklahoma Geology The Boone Formation consists of gray fine to coarse grained fossiliferous limestone interbedded with chert Some sections may be predominantly limestone or chert The cherts are dark in color in the lower part of the sequence and light in the upper part The quantity of chert varies considerably both vertically and horizontally The sequence includes an oolite member Short Creek Member near the top of the Boone Formation in western exposures and the generally chert free St Joe Member at its base The Boone Formation is well known for dissolutional features such as sinkholes caves and enlarged fissures Crinoids are the most common fossil found in the formation but brachiopods bryozoa mollusks corals shark material trilobites conodonts and others fossils are known The lower contact of the Boone Formation is considered disconformable in most places but some workers suggest a conformable lower contact with the Chattanooga Shale the contact with the St Joe Member is conformable The thickness of the Boone Formation is 300 to 350 feet in most of northern Arkansas but as much as 390 feet has been reported Original refere
264. ssolved oxygen DO 0 3 mg L SOP 322 Turbidity should be lt 10 Nephelometric turbidity units NTUs if possible Instruments that will be used to collect field measurements include a LaMotte 2020 Turbidimeter and a HydroLab MiniSonde or Datasonde 4A with a flow through cell All measurements will be documented on the Groundwater Sampling Record in the field logbook It is anticipated that nine groundwater samples will be collected and approximately three QC samples one duplicate one rinsate blank and one trip blank will be collected during the Phase 1 sampling event Purge water will be contained During the Phase 2 investigation a second round of groundwater samples will be collected at existing monitoring wells that are determined to have the potential to provide representative samples and new monitoring wells in accordance with the methodology described above 6 2 6 Leachate Sampling One round of leachate samples will be collected from selected existing leachate wells that were observed during the April 2007 site visit in the Phase 1 or Phase 2 areas of the existing landfill Figure 6 2 that are capable of yielding a sample To date leachate well locations have not been established by using a GPS or any other means Grab samples will be collected using a disposable bailer or similar sampling tool following the general procedures in SOP 330 It is anticipated that leachate samples will be collected at approximately three locations
265. sted below Temperature 0 2 C optional pH 0 1 Standard Units Specific Conductance 3 096 of reading Dissolved Oxygen 0 3 mg L or 10 which ever is greater Turbidity 10 NTUs 210NTU The measurements evaluated must be the last three consecutive measurements taken before purging is stopped The range between the highest and the lowest values for the last three measurements of temperature pH and specific conductance cannot exceed the stated limits The last three consecutive measurements turbidity must all be at or below the listed thresholds If stabilization criteria cannot be met after removing three to five well volumes collect the sample 8 of 10 Revision 1 September 2005 WELL PURGING SOP 321 7 5 Document and report the following as applicable Purging rate Drawdown in the well if any Total volume purged Pump or tubing intake placement Length and location of the screened interval 8 0 PURGE DRY WELLS This criterion applies only if purging was attempted and if it is impossible to balance the pumping rate with the rate of recharge at very low pumping rates lt 100 mL minute 8 1 If wells have previously and consistently purged dry and the current depth to groundwater indicates that the well will purge dry during the current sampling event minimize the amount of water removed from the well by using the same pump to purge and collect the sample 1 Place the pump or tubing intake wi
266. sure the defensibility of data and to verify the quality and quantity of work performed in the field PROCEDURE 3 1 Analytical Request 3 1 1 An Analytical Laboratory Services Request Form Attachment A will be completed for each project 3 1 2 The FTL will review the form for accuracy with respect to number and type of analyses requested and analytical costs and fax it to the laboratory at least one week prior to needing sample containers 3 1 3 Upon receipt of sample containers the FTL will verify that the correct number of sample containers and sample containers appropriate for the requested analyses were provided 3 2 Field Sampling Logbooks 3 2 1 Prior to each sampling event a sampling logbook consisting of loose leaf forms sample logs daily log instrument calibration record the field sampling plan and site specific health and safety plan will be prepared Each section of the field logbook contains consecutively numbered pages A memorandum may also accompany logbooks with additional instructions for the sampling event 3 2 2 Indelible black waterproof ink will be used for recording all data 3 2 3 Allinformation pertinent to a field activity must be entered into the daily log Attachment B This information will include at a minimum lof5 Revision 1 September 2005 SAMPLE CONTROL AND FIELD DOCUMENTATION SOP 120 Date Description of general field conditions e g weather conditions Field observations
267. surrogate recovery compound identification and compound quantification 4 Review data summaries for sample media identification sample location and descriptions proper concentration units and proper significant figures and 5 Identify potential data quality problems including unexpected results common laboratory contaminants and unusual spatial concentration identification relationships USEPA guidance 1989 will be followed in evaluating data sets with contaminants detected in blank samples as discussed below Blanks containing common laboratory contaminants Acetone 2 butanone or methyl ethyl ketone methylene chloride toluene and the phthalate esters are 7 17 REVISED August 1 2008 considered by USEPA to be common laboratory contaminants If the blank contains detectable levels of common laboratory contaminants then the sample results will be considered as positive results only if the concentrations in the sample exceed ten times the maximum amount detected in any blank If the concentration of a common laboratory contaminant is less than ten times the blank concentration then it will be concluded that the chemical was not detected in the particular sample and in accordance with USEPA guidance the blank related concentrations of the chemical will be considered to be the quantitation limit for the chemical in that sample If all samples contain levels of a common laboratory contaminant that are less than t
268. t Elevation LMPGS Length of Measuring Point to Ground Surface DTW Depth to Water DTWBGS Depth to Water BGS Form SOP 610 1 Water Level Elevation Revision 1 APPENDIX B Site Safety Plan SITE SAFETY PLAN CLOSURE AND POST CLOSURE ACTIVITIES NORTHWEST ARKANSAS WASTE MANAGEMENT INC PARSONS CLASS 1 LANDFILL PERMIT NO 0205 SR 2 AFIN 72 00171 DRAFT APRIL 22 2008 SITE SAFETY PLAN CLOSURE AND POST CLOSURE ACTIVITIES NORTHWEST ARKANSAS WASTE MANAGEMENT INC PARSONS CLASS 1 LANDFILL PERMIT NO 0205 SR 2 AFIN 72 00171 For site work at Northwest Arkansas Waste Management Inc Parsons Class 1 Landfill Permit No 0205 SR 2 AFIN 72 00171 Prepared by FIN Associates Ltd 3 Innwood Circle Suite 220 Little Rock AR 72211 FTN No 3013 202 DRAFT April 22 2008 DRAFT April 22 2008 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 0 HEALTH AND SAFETY PROGRAM wae eoeeeaneens 1 1 1 1 PUT OSE wastes r r e eart sled 1 1 1 2 Personnel Brel ess e aea NV be Pt 1 1 1 3 Training and Medical Surveillance uictor EFE 1 1 20 SITE DESCRIPTION oi LO den e 2 1 2 1 Site Location Background uiuo o tbe tdi reto ot ned 2 1 22 or VW OPK ACI TIES sca tre eG Pda eg t eds sete Sos des NN RE 2 1 30 ONSITE ORGANIZATION COORDINATION AND 3 1 TU HAZ
269. t be readily understood through the documentation The records shall include the identify of personnel involved in sampling preparation calibration or testing All information relating to the laboratory facilities equipment analytical test methods and re lated laboratory activities such as sample receipt sample preparation or data verification must be documented u All working files electronic files and archived records must be easily retrieved for inspection and verification purposes Page 32 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 CORPORATION Revision 19 LABORATORIES May 23 2007 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Sihi All documentation entries shall be signed or initialed by responsible staff The reason for the Wo signature or initials shall be clearly indicated in the records such as sampled by prepared by or reviewed by All data generated except those that are generated by automated data collection systems shall be recorded directly promptly and legibly in permanent ink Entries in records shall not be obliterated by methods such as erasures overwritten files or marking All correction to record keeping errors shall be made by one line marked through the error The individual making the corrections shall sign or initial and date the correction These criteria also shall apply to electronically maintained records a All records i
270. ted and delineated this data gap should be addressed by collecting soil samples for analytical testing 4 5 Groundwater Six monitoring wells were installed at the site in 1983 and groundwater monitoring has been conducted at the site since 1984 Monitoring wells are reportedly completed in the Boone St Joe aquifer as open hole boreholes below surface casing that typically extends about 10 ft into the bedrock Original permit conditions specified the collection of samples from the six onsite wells MW 1 MW 2 MW 3 MW 4 MW 5 and MW 6 for the analysis of iron lead zinc cadmium manganese chloride total dissolved solids TDS chemical oxygen demand COD pH and total hardness In compliance with permit conditions the retention pond east of the Class 4 area at the site was also sampled for the same parameters VOCs have been analyzed periodically at the site since March 1989 Three wells were replaced in August 1989 at the request of ADEQ due to elevated turbidity and questionable integrity MW 7 replaced MW 2 MW 8 replaced MW 3 and MW 9 replaced MW 4 Goodman reported in 1985 that monitoring well MW 1 was run over by a truck and damaged it is unknown why this well was not replaced There was reportedly some historical confusion regarding numbering of the monitoring wells apparently between original 4 3 REVISED August 1 2008 wells and the respective replacement well samples for replacement wells were apparently labe
271. tegories will assist in providing a long term solution and in some circumstances will require the generation of a Corrective and Preventative Action plan for implementation of practices and policies including that of additional training 15 8 2 5Factors that affect data quality failure to meet calibration criteria inadequate record keeping miscalculations improper storage or preservation of samples require investigation and corrective ac tion 15 8 2 6Factors assessed by control chart interpretation see Interpretation of Control Charts in Section 15 6 5 are those of shifts trends biases and data outside of control limits The detection of one of the above conditions will be documented as appropriate on the control chart as an outlier and on LIMs Laboratory Corrective Action form The out of control condition will then be investigated to determine whether the condition indicates a truly out of control situation or a possible random error This form shall document corrective actions taken that is whether the sample was re analyzed re calculated or whether the data was released for reporting to the client in LIMS 15 8 2 7A corrective action investigation is completed to determine the cause of any non conformances or failures detected by the quality system A systematic approach to reviewing data entry along with the associated raw data can effectively determine the cause for 95 of the corrective actions detected The following list the c
272. teville May 2007 Goodman W M 1985 A Hydrogeologic Evaluation of the Northwest Arkansas Waste Management Landfill Washington County Arkansas A thesis submitted in partial fulfillment of the requirements for the degree of Master of Science University of Arkansas January 1985 McFarland J D 1998 Stratigraphic Summary of Arkansas Arkansas Geological Commission Information Circular 36 39 pp Steele Kenneth F 1989 Proposed Location of New and Replacement Monitoring Wells at Northwest Arkansas Waste Management Landfill May 30 1989 USDA 1969 Soil Survey Washington County Arkansas United States Department of Agriculture Soil Conservation Service March 1969 USEPA 1989 Risk Assessment Guidance for Superfund Volume I Human Health Evaluation Manual Part A SW 846 Interim Final United States Environmental Protection Agency December 1989 USEPA 2001 USEPA requirements for Quality Assurance Project Plans USEPA QA RS USEPA 240 B 01 003 United States Environmental Protection Agency Office of Environmental Information Washington DC March 2001 USEPA 2007 2008 Region 6 Human Health Medium Specific Screening Levels United States Environmental Protection Agency December 2007 APPENDIX A Standard Operating Procedures STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES CLOSURE AND POST CLOSURE ACTIVITIES PHASE I INVESTIGATION PARSON S LANDFILL PERMIT NO 0205 SR 2 AFIN 72 00171 APRIL 1 2008 STANDARD OPERATING PROCE
273. th and the environment associated with the contaminants and 4 After site characterization is completed depending on the findings decide on design and implementation of remedial measures The site is currently being used to pasture cattle The general topography of the Class 1 landfill area is relatively flat but steep slopes and ravines bound portions of the site Differential settling in the areas used for trench fill have resulted in an undulating surface with fissuring of the surface and depressions as deep as 10 ft Gas vents and leachate wells many of which are broken off or otherwise damaged are located in the trench fill area A 3 inch natural gas distribution line owned and maintained by Arkansas Western Gas Company crosses the site 2 2 Scope of Work Activities The project scope of work is attached to this SSP Attachment 2 2 1 DRAFT April 22 2008 3 0 ONSITE ORGANIZATION COORDINATION AND CONTROL The following personnel are designated to carry out the stated job functions onsite ADEQ PROJECT COORDINATOR Bryan Leamons PE ASSOCIATE PROJECT MANAGER Paul Crawford PE PG PROJECT HYDROGEOLOGIST Dianne Lincicome PE PG FTN FIELD TEAM MEMBERS Dana Derrington site geologist Curtis Nunn PG site geologist Jacob Brickman environmental scientist Mark Koch environmental scientist SUBCONTRACTOR Drilling Contractor 3 1 DRAFT April 22 2008 4 0 HAZARD EVALUATION
274. thalene 91 20 3 82700 6202941 065000 6 12E 02 19E 02 21E 02 4 0E 00 44E 02 6 6E 01 Po 1 4 Napthoquinone 130 15 4 8270 10000 tO 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 L 1 Napthylamine 134 327 82700 J 10000 J X p 66601 6 601 2 Napthylamine 91 59 8 8270 3 Jp 38 D1 Q 66 01 _ 6 66501 5 Nitro o toluidine 99 55 8 8270C 10 000000 0 6 6E 01 6 6E 01 Po o Nitroaniline or 2 Nitroaniline 88 74 4 82700 109 500000 037400 1 8E 02 5 9E 03 2 0E 03 2 5E 02 3 3E 00 gap Heros exer pc py o Nitrophenol or 2 Nitrophenol 88 75 5 82700 033200 o 23Eo2 6 6E 01 O O Triethyl phosphorothioate 126 681 8270 3 pj 100000 E OF 6 66501 95 53 4 82700 p Dimethylamino azobenzene 60 11 7 8270C p Chloro m cresol or 4 Chloro 3methylphenol 59 50 7 8270 10000 tO f 100000 tO 0 566000 20 __ 6 6 01 _ 6 6 01 __ eEot 66 0 3 8E 02 6 6E 01 D arde ee p Chloroaniline or 4 Chloroaniline 106 47 8 8270C 146 000000 0 65100 20 24E 02 82E 03 27E 08 3 0E 02 44E 02 6 6E 01 p Nitroaniline or 4 Nitroaniline 100 01 6 8270 0533000___ ERE 3 6E 02 3 3E 00 or 4 Nitrophenol 100 02 7
275. the risk assessment Much of the historical data for the site is of questionable quality because of a lack of QA QC documentation and undocumented sampling procedures Therefore existing data will be 7 6 REVISED August 1 2008 compiled and presented in the database but will not be compared to Region 6 residential HHMSSLs 7 1 8 Special Training Certification No specialized training or certification is necessary for implementation of the field work described in Section 6 0 Sampling and laboratory personnel involved with this project will be familiar with the requirements of this QAPP and are experienced or will be trained in the procedures necessary for sampling and analysis In the event that results suggest chemical analyses that are not part of ADEQ s certification process or for which AIC is not ADEQ certified the FTN Project Manager will coordinate with ADEQ staff to identify the appropriate analytical support and or approach 7 1 9 Documents and Records The FTN Project Manager will ensure that field personnel have been provided the most current approved version of the QAPP The Field Sampling Team Leader is responsible for monitoring sampling operations and ensuring that pertinent information is recorded during sampling operations Site dedicated notebooks will be used for recording field observations and measurements and entries will be made in black indelible ink These logs will be archived as permanent records Any
276. the site is about 100 to 120 ft Part of the site lies at a local topographic high point Surface water runoff flows radially from the topographic high point until it is intercepted by onsite ponds or natural drainages 2 3 Site History The original facility solid waste permit was issued to Harold Parsons of Springdale Arkansas in 1983 as the East Side Sanitary Landfill covering areas for both putrescible wastes Class 1 and non putrescible wastes Class 4 Mr Harold Parsons is the owner of the property and the facility has historically been referred to as the Parson s Landfill The permit was subsequently transferred to Northwest Arkansas Waste Management Inc prior to April 1985 The landfill facility was constructed before implementation of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act RCRA Subtitle D or Arkansas Pollution Control and Ecology Commission APCEC Regulation No 22 liner requirements The facility received a water permit No 2835 W on June 7 1983 that authorized the facility to operate and discharge from a sediment pond located on the landfill site The Class 1 landfill was a trench fill operation and the Class 4 landfill was a ravine fill operation minor modification of the permit was approved by ADEQ on October 2 1985 that renumbered the trenches and corresponding fill sequence and allowed for excavations with a 2 3 REVISED August 1 2008 track hoe The solid waste permit was modified on August
277. thin the well screened interval Use very small diameter Teflon Polyethylene or PP tubing and the smallest possible pump chamber volume to minimize the total volume of water pumped from the well and to reduce drawdown 3 Select tubing that is thick enough to minimize oxygen transfer through the tubing walls while pumping 4 Pump at the lowest possible rate 100 mL to 500 mL minute or less to reduce drawdown to a minimum 5 Purge at least two volumes of the pumping system pump tubing and flow cell if used 6 Measure stabilization parameters begin to collect the samples 8 2 Collect samples immediately after purging is complete The time period between completing the purge and sampling cannot exceed 12 hours If sample collection does not occur within one hour of purging completion re measure the field parameters prior to collecting the sample 9 0 RECORDS The Field Team Leader FTL is responsible for maintaining permanent QC sample records 9 1 Sample Collection Record 9 2 Daily Log 9 of 10 Revision 1 September 2005 WELL PURGING SOP 321 10 0 REFERENCES 10 1 USEPA Region 4 1966 Environmental Investigations Standard Operating Procedures and Quality Assurance Manual May 1966 10 2 Puls R W and Barcelona 1996 Groundwater Issue Paper Low Flow Minimal Drawdown Groundwater Sampling Procedures USEPA EPA 540 S 95 504 12 pp 10 3 Wilde F D D B Radtke J Gibs and R T Iwastsubo eds 1988 Nat
278. ting the purging criteria 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 Conventional purge For wells with 1 fully submerged screen and pump or intake tubing placed at the top of the water column 2 partially submerged well screen or 3 screened interval is unknown purge a minimum of one well volume prior to collecting measurements of the field parameters Take measurements of the field parameters no sooner than two to three minutes apart Minimizing purge volume For wells with fully submerged screen and pump or intake tubing placed within the screened interval purge until the water level has stabilized well recovery rate equals the purge rate then purge a minimum of one volume of the pump associated tubing and flow container if used prior to collecting measurements of the field parameters Take measurements of the field parameters no sooner than two to three minutes apart Purge at least three volumes of the pump associated tubing and flow container if used prior to collecting a sample Purging Completion The use of a flow through cell to measure the stabilization parameters using this technique is required Every attempt must be made to match the pumping rate with the recharge rate of the well before evaluating the purging criteria At a minimum stabilization parameters will include temperature pH and specific conductance Purging is considered complete if three consecutive measurements of the stabilization parameters meet the criteria li
279. tion 40 days after extraction Cool lt 6 C HCL pH 2 14 days Cool lt 6 C HCL pH lt 2 Cool lt 6 C HCL pH lt 2 14 days Cool lt 6 C 7 days until extraction 40 days after extraction Cool lt 6 C 7 days until extraction 40 days after extraction PARAMETER MATRIX Oil and Grease Organic Carbon Total Organic Halogens Total Organic Halogens Ab sorbable AOX Petroleum Hydrocarbons Total Recoverable Petroleum Hydrocarbons Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons Volatile GRO Purgeable Halocarbons Purgeable Aromatic Hydrocarbons BTEX Petroleum Hydrocarbons Extractable DRO Alcohols and Glycols ia aa 40 days after extraction 40 days after extraction 40 days after extraction 40 days after extraction Organochlorine Pesti cides and PCBs Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons Chlorinated Hydrocar bons Organophosphorus Pesti cides Semivolatiles Organics Volatiles Volatiles W No R CL2 Volatiles W w RCL2 Volatiles a Om lO RM 5035 VOA Cool lt 6 C 14 days RM 5031 125 ml RM 5032 125 ml Use Teflon lined lids RM5032 VOA Use Tef 10 sodium thiosulfate solution Gently Semivolatiles CWS 125 ml wide mouth None Extracted within 14 Orga Pest Teflon lined lid days and extracts ana PCBs lyzed within 40 days Herbicides following extractions following extractions RM5030 VOA Cool lt 6 C HCL pH lt 2 14 days RM5031 VOA RM5032 VOA Use
280. tion of aqueous IDW will be based on results of groundwater analysis Groundwater and soil rock data that are below TCLP regulatory levels thus indicative of non hazardous wastes will then be compared to Region 6 residential HHMSSLs Aqueous and solid wastes having concentrations below these screening levels will be considered non contaminated IDW and discharged to the ground Soil samples having total concentrations that exceed TCLP levels will be further evaluated using the TCLP for VOCs and RCRA metals Based upon waste characterization results the wastes will be disposed of at an appropriate disposal facility Should the wastes be determined to be hazardous FTN will assist ADEQ in obtaining a provisional USEPA generator identification number for the site A responsible individual will be assigned for signing all waste manifests if necessary for wastes shipped from the site 6 4 Decontamination Procedures Disposable sampling tools plastic or metal will be used as much as possible to minimize the need for decontamination of sampling tools Disposable equipment and clothing will be containerized for future disposal All non dedicated sampling and measurement equipment will be decontaminated Sampling equipment will be decontaminated before each use and at the end of the day At no time will decontaminated equipment be placed directly on the ground General decontamination procedures are described in SOP 130 6 10 REVISED August 1
281. tion of additional quality control samples At times split samples may be specified ina SAP Split samples measure the variability between laboratories Therefore the laboratory samples must be subsamples of the same parent sample and every attempt must be made to ensure sample homogeneity Collecting split samples for soils sediments chemical wastes and sludge is not recommended because a true split sample in these matrices is not practicable 6 0 PROCEDURE 6 1 6 2 6 3 Field Duplicates Collect two separate samples from the same source and at the same location and time Place the samples in separate container label each as a unique sample and submit both samples for the same analyses When possible collect duplicate samples from sampling locations where contamination is present Duplicates may be prepared as blind samples by assigning a location code that does not indicate it is a duplicate sample Equipment Rinsate Blank After decontaminating the field sampling equipment rinse with deionized water and collect the rinsate for analysis Assure that all equipment surfaces that come in contact with the sampling materials are rinsed e g inside of a bailer Do not use tap water or drinking water purchased from a local store as these sources typically contain trihalomethanes and inorganics Field Blanks Collect field blanks if no equipment blanks are prepared The sample container is used to collect the samples by
282. tions for the site Proposed well locations and installation construction details will be provided in the Phase 2 Work Plan Existing monitoring wells that are unusable or deemed incapable of yielding representative groundwater samples will be decommissioned 6 6 6 Explosive Gas Monitoring During the Phase 2 investigation semi permanent explosive gas monitoring probes will be installed at the property boundary and or other select locations and gas monitoring will be performed The exact number and location of probes will be based on findings from the site reconnaissance Depending on the local surface geology the gas probes will be installed using either a truck mounted drill rig using hollow stem auger or a direct push technology DPT unit using the procedures described in SOP 410 The probes will be installed to a total depth of approximately 20 ft bgs or until probe refusal A slotted 1 inch diameter PVC pipe will be placed in the boring and the annulus space will be backfilled with sand to within 1 ft of the ground surface The final 1 ft of annulus space will be sealed using hydrated bentonite chips A locking cover will be installed on each probe to deter tampering or unauthorized access to the probes Upon completion of the installation of the monitoring probes each probe will be numbered their 6 14 REVISED August 1 2008 approximate location marked with a portable GPS receiver and allowed to stabilize for a minimum of
283. to be DOT regulated the field team member who will package and ship the samples must have appropriate DOT training 2 0 SCOPE 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 This SOP shall be used in conjunction with the site specific health and safety plan HASP to help ensure that personnel performing the work are protected from equipment related accidents and from exposure to hazardous constituents Samples are expected to have a low concentration of potential contaminants although higher concentrations will be present in some cases These low concentration samples that do not satisfy DOT hazard class definitions are classified as environmental samples and are not subject to DOT regulations Historical data knowledge of process and field screening results will assist the team members in making decisions as to whether a sample can be designated as environmental or needs to be treated as a DOT regulated material While transporting samples sample integrity samples must be locked and or under constant supervision and protected from tampering and chain of custody must be maintained according to SOP 120 Sample control and Field Documentation Upon receipt at the analytical laboratory a sample custodian will check each sample for proper container preservatives and labels and verify that the information is accurately reflected on the chain of custody The responsible Field Team Leader FTL will ensure the procedures in the SOP are followed
284. turated to some depth below the bedrock surface The presence of this fracture trace was considered in the design of the landfill by eliminating the placement of waste in this area 3 2 Hydrogeology and Local Groundwater Use Regionally the groundwater flow direction in the Boone St Joe aquifer is to the east toward Beaver Lake Goodman 1985 The direction of groundwater flow from the site has been reported as northeast ADEQ 2005a and radially away from the topographic high point Steele 1989 In karst environments e g the Boone Formation the direction of groundwater flow is strongly influenced by jointing fracturing and associated solution features Several seeps and springs have been identified in the vicinity of the landfill Depths to groundwater in monitoring wells at the site have been measured from about 60 ft to 90 ft below ground surface bgs ADEQ 2005b Goodman 1985 reported that borings 3 3 REVISED August 1 2008 penetrating the bedrock surface encountered a thin zone of saturation approximately 0 5 ft perched above the bedrock and stated that flow within this zone is predominantly lateral with vertical diffuse flow to the underlying Boone St Joe aquifer Goodman 1985 concluded that data from onsite monitoring wells completed in the bedrock showed that the site is within a recharge area for the aquifer and presented evidence of a multiple flow system within the Boone St Joe aquifer at the site
285. ual November 2001 8 2 1986 RCRA Ground Water Monitoring Technical Enforcement Guidance Document OSWER Washington D C 3 of 3 Revision 1 September 2005 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 1 of 2 LOCATION SURVEYING SOP 210 PURPOSE This Standard Operating Procedure SOP describes the process for developing site survey data Survey personnel who perform control property easement or boundary surveys must be registered professional land surveyors A registered land surveyor will survey property boundaries when required Surveys may also be conducted to develop site maps and provide coordinates for sampling locations SCOPE 2 1 This SOP will be implemented when provided coordinates for sampling sites 2 2 This SOP will be used in conjunction with the site specific health and safety plan HASP to help ensure that personnel performing the work are protected from equipment related accidents and from exposure to hazardous constituents 2 3 The site specific work plan will identify survey needs EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS The surveying subcontractor will supply all equipment and materials that will be used during site surveys All sample locations will be staked and identified on a site map that will be provided to the surveyor The surveying subcontractor may use either traditional survey techniques or a global positioning system GPS to obtain acceptable survey data PROCEDURE 4 1 The Project Manager or designee shall determin
286. ugust 1 2008 the Arkansas Department of Health Information data gaps will be identified and obtained where available 6 6 2 Site Reconnaissance A site reconnaissance will be conducted to 1 Verify the locations construction conditions of existing groundwater monitoring wells gas vents and leachate wells Establish coordinates using GPS techniques during period of minimal overhead tree canopy The surface condition will be examined and total depths and water levels will be measured at each location Explosive gas will also be measured at each location Approximate casing stick up will be measured at each monitoring well 2 Attempt to locate original groundwater wells at the site that were reportedly replaced to verify that they were plugged and abandoned 3 Remove the PVC QED diaphragm type pumps from MW 1 MW 12 and MW 13 if possible to assess their condition 4 Locate seeps and springs and establish coordinates using GPS techniques during wet period of year with minimal overhead tree canopy Label stake seeps near the landfill to allow for consistent identification by future sampling entities 5 Identify and delineate areas used for Class 1 waste disposal Class 4 waste disposal and sludge composting determine if proposed expansions to each landfill were implemented This will include delineating areas where the landfill cover is cracked and areas of differential settlement Establish limits of each area using GPS t
287. ure the wellbeing of field personnel official visitors and the community surrounding the site The SSP provides procedures for preventing responding to and reporting injuries illnesses and environmental emergency situations This SSP must be modified or amended when circumstances or conditions develop that are beyond the scope of routine operations for the tasks described in Attachment 2 or as additional information about the site becomes available Changes in project work scope and or site conditions as described must be amended in writing by the Project Manager on the Amendment Sheet Attachment 3 This SSP complies with Title 29 Code of Federal Regulations CFR Part 1910 120 b 1 2 Personnel Briefings FTN employees and subcontractor s will be informed of the provisions of this SSP Briefings will be conducted prior to initial entry to the project area and at other times as required by the Client The SSP will be available onsite to field personnel who will acknowledge having read the SSP and confirm that they are familiar with and agree to abide by its provisions by signing the attached certification Copies of the SSP will be included in the FTN project files and will be carried to the site by field personnel 1 3 Training and Medical Surveillance It is the responsibility of each employer to determine if their employees meet the requirements for medical surveillance according to 29 CFR 1910 120 f Each contractor is 1 1 DR
288. ures 2 Plan view groundwater surface water sample map at well seep spring locations along with analytical results of constituents of concern detected in concentrations greater than MCLs or Region 6 residential water HHMSSLs Data will be presented in table form at sample locations 3 Plan view maps showing locations of gas monitoring probes along with monitoring results 4 Potentiometric surface maps Contaminant plume maps for site related constituents of concern present in groundwater at concentrations greater than MCLs In addition to the site maps FTN will prepare cross sections as appropriate which include 1 Lithologic logs and screened intervals for wells 2 Top of potentiometric surface and analytical results 3 Top of bedrock surface 4 Locations and depths of disposal areas lineaments surface water features and 5 Interpreted extent of contamination displayed by a dashed line 9 1 REVISED August 1 2008 9 2 Reports 9 2 14 Phase 1 Closure and Post Closure Work Activities Report A short report will be prepared presenting the preliminary findings from the site reconnaissance and the Phase 1 field investigations A work plan and budget for Phase 2 activities will be presented in the report to complete the Phase 2 field investigations 9 2 2 Closure and Post Closure Work Activities Summary Report The Closure and Post Closure Work Activities Summary Report will present the site history a refined conc
289. w stem augers HSA leave the augers in the hole during filter pack placement and bentonite seal placement to the extent practical Maintain sand bentonite in the casing a small distance 1 to 2 ft above the bottom of the auger for even placement as the augers are removed Special attention should be given to the amount of fill material if this procedure is followed due to the risk of bridging in saturated conditions Place a cap over the top of the well casing before placing annular backfill materials Any use of solvents and glues is prohibited Wearing disposable gloves assemble pre cleaned screen casing string lower to the bottom of the borehole and center casing in place 2 of 6 Revision 2 June 2007 MONITORING WELL CONSTRUCTION SOP 510 4 3 Filter pack helps ensure continuous flow capability from the natural formation into the well bore The following is a list of instructions for using a sand pack 4 3 1 Use well sorted and rounded sand that is clean inert siliceous and compatible with the screen slot size in use 4 3 2 Record the filter pack size the company from which it was purchased and the lot number if available for each installation Pint size samples of filter pack material may be collected for quality control 4 3 3 Fill the annulus between the well screen and borehole wall with silica sand to a height of 2 feet above the screened interval For wells greater than 30 ft in depth a tremie pipe will be use
290. with the environment and the selected analytes In selecting groundwater purging and sampling equipment give consideration to the depth of the well the depth to groundwater the volume of water to be evacuated the sampling and purging technique and the analytes of interest 3 1 Flow Container Use a flow through cell or container when collecting measurements for purging stabilization The design must ensure that fresh formation water continuously contacts the measuring devices and does not aerate the sample or otherwise affect the groundwater properties 3 2 Pumps Pumps or pump tubing must be lowered and retrieved from the well slowly and carefully to minimize disturbance to the formation water This is especially critical at the air water interface Avoid the resuspension of sediment particles turbidity at the bottom of the well or adhered to the well casing during positioning of the pump or tubing 1 of 10 Revision 1 September 2005 WELL PURGING SOP 321 32 Peristaltic Pump Use a variable speed peristaltic pump to purge groundwater from wells when the static water level in the well is no greater than 20 25 feet below ground surface bgs If the water levels are deeper than 18 20 feet bgs the pumping velocity will decrease A variable speed peristaltic pump can be used for normal purging and sampling sampling low permeability aquifers or formations and collecting filtered groundwater samples Most analyte groups ca
291. y R The mean and the standard deviation will be calculated The initial data will be reviewed for outliers The Grubbs Test for Outlying Observations will be used for making statistical decisions on rejection of suspect data From this data the upper and lower control limits and warning limits will be calculated Upper Control Limit UCL Mean of R 3s Lower Control Limit LCL Mean of R 3s Warning Limits WL Mean of R 2s Page 51 of 121 8600 Kanis Road Little Rock AR 72204 www americaninterplex com 501 224 5060 FAX 501 224 5072 i AMERICAN INTERPLEX Section 15 CORPORATION hie LABORATORIES Revision 19 May 23 2007 s denotes standard deviation The of each laboratory control sample spike or matrix spike duplicate will be plotted on a Shewart control chart and compared with method criteria and or statistically generated control limits 15 7 42 Relative Percent Difference RPD Data precision will be evaluated on the results of matrix spike and matrix spike duplicate samples or samples analyzed in duplicates All analyses which have criteria defined by a recognized source EPA ASTM Standard Methods for Relative Percent Difference will be evaluated against these limits For those methods in which no performance criteria has been es tablished the average and standard deviation of the absolute values of the Relative Percent Difference RPD will be calculated and a range chart will be established The lower contr
292. y the method To each cali bration standard a known constant amount of one or more internal standards is added Calibration of the GC MS is established and validated by the injection of traceable standards at levels over the range of expected sample concentrations In addition to surrogate recovery compounds sample extracts are spiked with an internal calibration standard that spans the retention time range of the analytes of interest The concentrations of the analytes are calculated by the Response Factor RF to the internal standards for each sample Analysis of Bromofluorobenzene BFB for volatiles and Decafluorotriphenylphosphine DFTPP for semi volatiles is performed every twelve 12 hours during sample analysis The tuning acceptance crite ria must be met before the analysis of the calibration curve standard or the calibration check standard can begin Calculations of response factor relative standard deviation internal standard or the calibra tion factor must be less than the method requirements A system performance check must be performed to ensure that minimum average RFs are met before the calibration curve is used The minimum acceptable average RF for the System Performance Check Compounds SPCCs is 0 050 The working calibration curve must be verified every twelve 12 hours by the injection of one or more calibration check compounds CCC If the response for any analytes varies from the predicted response as specified in th

class 1 landfill permit no. 0205-sr-2 afin: 72-00171

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents